CalebKoster/Translation_Note_Alignment

1Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note2front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Romans\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–15)\n2. Main Theme: Righteousness is received by trusting in Jesus Christ (1:16–17)\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)\n7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)\n8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)\n\n### Who wrote the book of Romans?\n\nThe Apostle Paul wrote the book of Romans and many other books in the New Testament. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was part of a strict Jewish religious group called the Pharisees. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.\n\n### What is the book of Romans about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” ([16:26](../16/26.md)).\n\nIn this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1–11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12–16),\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?\n\nIn Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ ([1:1](../01/01.md)), the Seed of David ([1:3](../01/03.md)), the Son of God ([1:4](../01/04.md)), the Lord Jesus Christ ([1:7](../01/07.md)), Christ Jesus ([3:24](../03/24.md)), Propitiation ([3:25](../03/025.md)), Jesus ([3:26](../03/26.md)), Jesus our Lord ([4:24](../04/24.md)), Lord of Hosts ([9:29](../09/29.md)), a Stone of Stumbling and Rock of Offense ([9:33](../09/33.md)), the End of the Law ([10:4](../10/04.md)), the Deliverer ([11:26](../11/26.md)), Lord of the Dead and the Living ([14:9](../14/09.md)), and the Root of Jesse ([15:12](../15/12.md)).\n\n### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?\n\nPaul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four Gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” ([5:1](../05/01.md)), “works of the law” ([3:20](../03/20.md)), “reconcile” ([5:10](../05/10.md)), “propitiation” ([3:25](../03/25.md)), “sanctification” ([6:19](../06/19.md)), and “the old man” ([6:6](../06/06.md)). If your language doesn’t have similar words, you can develop short phrases to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”\n\nTranslators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.\n\n### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel ([11:5](../11/05.md))?\n\nThe idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”\n\nIn [11:1–9](../11/01.md), Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?\n\nThe phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in [3:24](../03/24.md); [6:11](../06/11.md), [23](../06/23.md); [8:1](../08/01.md), [2](../08/02.md), [39](../08/39.md); [9:1](../09/01.md); [12:5](../12/05.md), [17](../12/17.md); [15:17](../15/17.md); and [16:3](../16/03.md), [7](../16/07.md), [9](../16/09.md), [10](../16/10.md). Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.\n\nThese phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in [3:24](../03/24.md) (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In [8:9](../08/09.md) (“you are not in the flesh, but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In [9:1](../09/01.md) (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.\n\nNevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?\n\nThe Scriptures use such words to indicate any one of some various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: [1:7](../01/07.md))\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: [8:27](../08/27.md); [12:13](../12/13.md); [15:25](../15/25.md), [26](../15/26.md), [31](../15/31.md); [16:2](../16/02.md), [15](../16/15.md))\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: [15:16](../15/16.md))\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Romans?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.\n\n* “he \\[God\\] works all things together for good” ([8:28](../08/28.md)). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”\n* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” ([11:6](../11/06.md)). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”\n\nThe following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the book of Romans.\n\n* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” ([16:24](../16/24.md)).\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])31:intro	hn5n				0	# Romans 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–15)\n    * Greeting (1:1–7)\n    * Paul plans to visit Rome (1:8–15)\n2. Main Theme: Righteousness is received by having faith in Jesus Christ (1:16–17)\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n    * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The gospel\n\nThis chapter refers to the contents of the book of Romans as “the gospel” ([1:2](../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a Gospel as are Matthew, Mark, Luke, or John, which are historical accounts of the life of Jesus. Instead, chapters 1–8 present the biblical gospel, which is the good news of salvation. The gospel contains the following true ideas: everyone has sinned, Jesus died for our sins, and Jesus came back to life again so that we might live for his glory and receive eternal life when we die.\n\n### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God\n\nIn this chapter Paul explains that no one has an excuse for sinning. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the eternal punishment of God. The requirement for this punishment was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “God gave them over”\n\nMany scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God allows men to pursue their own sinful desires; he does not force them to act sinfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])41:1	x3em		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Παῦλος	1	In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul”51:1	e417		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	δοῦλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, κλητὸς ἀπόστολος	1	These two phrases give further information about Paul. He describes himself as being someone whom God has given the position and authority of being Christ’s **servant** and **apostle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person whom God has made a servant of Christ Jesus, and whom he has called to represent him”61:1	v5b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus called to be an apostle and set apart”71:1	ukts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ	1	Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus**set** him **apart**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach the gospel of God” or “so that I could announce the good news from God”81:1	ji90		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God”91:2	cu3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃ	1	Here, **which** indicates that what follows is further information about “the gospel of God” mentioned in the previous verse. Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” originated from **the holy Scriptures**, which also come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel”101:3	lab1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about God’s Son, “Christ Jesus”, as mentioned in [1:1](../01/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about his Son”111:3	lk5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus.121:3	y2uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ	1	Here, **from a seed of David** is an idiom that refers to a descendant of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born a descendant of David”131:3	rj9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here, **according to the flesh** is an idiom meaning “with reference to physical descent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “according to natural descent”141:4	nhz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει κατὰ Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, as in the UST.151:4	at5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **God** did it. Alternate translation: “whom God designated as the Son of God”161:4	cp80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	**Son of God** is an important title that describes the relationship between **God** and **Jesus**.171:4	h32u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει	1	Here, **in power** could refer to: (1) the means by which God designated Jesus as the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated the Son of God by means of power” (2) a new level of power God gave to the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated as the powerful Son of God”181:4	m89w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God’s **Spirit** that is characterized by **holiness**. This refers to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST.191:4	js9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead ones”201:4	h97z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase translated **of dead ones** refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from among dead people”211:4	zvql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the place from where **Jesus** was resurrected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from death” or “from among the dead ones”221:4	brej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, **our** refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.231:5	ww9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ	1	Here, **whom** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus”241:5	jr9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **apostleship**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he who acted kindly toward us and made us his apostles”251:5	mosg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐλάβομεν	1	Here, **we** is exclusive, and your language may require you to mark this form. It could refer to: (1) Paul and other apostles, as in the UST. (2) Paul speaking about himself in a plural form. Alternate translation: “I received”261:5	mv5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1	Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of”271:5	krzj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to faithfully obey Jesus among all the Gentiles”281:5	cf3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	Here, **obedience of faith** could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” (2) obedience that results from trusting in God. Alternate translation: “faith that results in obedience”291:5	eem9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	Here, **the Gentiles** could refer to: (1) the nations. Use this interpretation if you interpreted **we** to refer to all the apostles and retained it in your translation. Alternate translation: “among all people groups” (2) non-Jewish people groups. Use this interpretation if you interpreted **we** to refer only to Paul and translated it as “I”. Alternate translation: “among all non-Jewish people”301:5	rd3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “we received grace and apostleship for the sake of his name, for obedience of the faith among all the Gentiles”311:5	sxc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Here, **name** could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus” (2) Jesus’ reputation. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus’ fame”321:6	xurz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν οἷς	1	Here, **whom** refers to “the Gentiles” who were mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated “the Gentiles” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “among the nations” or “among the Gentiles”331:6	sks2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1	In this letter, with four exceptions, the words **you** and “your” are plural and refer to the recipients of this letter, who are the believers in Rome (See [1:7](../01/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome”341:6	qq9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **called ones** who were called by **Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “ones called by Jesus Christ”351:7	z85a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ	1	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, and they would name those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “To all of you who are in Rome”361:7	zfwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the adjective **beloved** as a noun in order to describe the church at Rome. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are loved of God”371:7	rkdh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **beloved** who are loved by **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “loved by God”381:7	v8bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace”391:7	ys4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show his gracious acts to you and make you feel peaceful”401:7	d8pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The word **Father** here is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus and the relationship between God and believers. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ”411:7	j61d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	When Paul writes **our** here, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so **our** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “who is the Father of us Christians”421:8	yrau		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ”431:8	totr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πρῶτον μὲν	1	**First** here indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is”441:8	tdsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1	Paul is using the possessive form **my God** to express that he belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that he owns God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that owns me”451:8	bphf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way you trust in Christ”461:8	efqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith”471:8	k7qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ	1	Here, **the whole world** is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is”481:9	c7pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because”491:9	twht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μάρτυς & μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence, if you need to do so. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son”501:9	dx6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	μάρτυς & μού & ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase gives further information about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness, and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son”511:9	ll1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μάρτυς & μού	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **witness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me”521:9	ydnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	Here, **spirit** refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly”531:9	ih0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	Here, **in** indicates the means by which Paul served God and **gospel** refers specifically to proclaiming the **gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel”541:9	o66d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** that is about God’s **Son**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son”551:9	r2l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ	1	**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God.561:9	f9p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἀδιαλείπτως	1	Here, **continually** is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently Paul prayed for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually”571:9	vtuq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	Here, **making mention** is an idiom for praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … praying for you”581:10	mdc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος	1	This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in the previous verse. Paul uses them to emphasize how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase for the similar passage in the previous verse and in this verse provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God”591:10	oi0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1	Here, the word **always** is an exaggeration that figuratively expresses the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “frequently”601:10	b5wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God wills for me” or “because God wants me”611:11	ki6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that this is a reason clause. Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in [1:9–10](../01/09.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am always requesting this because”621:11	gjdu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς	1	Paul uses **see** to describe not only seeing the Christians in Rome, but also visiting them and spending time with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you”631:11	b23b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, **so that** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he wants to visit the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”641:12	pnnm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν	1	Here, **and that is** gives further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically”651:12	ux1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to mutually encourage each other”661:12	ddtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the trust in Jesus that both he and his readers shared. Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith”671:12	e6py		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	See how you translated **faith** in [1:5](../01/05.md)681:13	yi1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you to be informed”691:13	rwzn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγνοεῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to not know”701:13	u1cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here to refer to both male and female believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”711:13	zvrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that **until now** means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was no longer **hindered** at the moment he wrote these words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I have been hindered and still am hindered now”721:13	b92o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκωλύθην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God hindered me”731:13	gnu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, **fruit** could refer to: (1) people believing in the gospel as a result of Paul’s preaching, which would connect this verse to the idea in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternative translation: “so that I might lead people to salvation among you also” (2) strengthening the believers in Rome, in which case this would have the same meaning as “some spiritual, gracious gift” in [1:11](../01/11.md). Alternative translation: “so that I might strengthen you also”741:14	s4bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀφειλέτης εἰμί	1	Paul speaks of himself as if he were a **debtor** who owed money to people who were not Jews, such as **Greeks** and **barbarians**. Paul means that he was obligated to preach the gospel to non-Jews because God had commanded him to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation, “I am obliged to preach the gospel”751:14	j2sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις	1	Here Paul uses **Greeks** and **barbarians** to represent all the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of Gentiles”761:14	lio6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1	Here Paul uses **wise ones** and **foolish ones** to represent all types of people among the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people among the Gentiles”771:14	q728		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person”781:15	h9zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως	1	**So** here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why”791:16	oa6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because”801:16	mm2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am proud”811:16	nvkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	Here, **gospel** refers specifically to the preaching of the **gospel** that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel”821:16	f5x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** as the powerful way that **God** saves people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves”831:16	sz5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Here, **for** indicates that **salvation** is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation”841:16	merb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone”851:16	htqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah”861:16	dwtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1	Paul is speaking of Jewish people and Greek people in general, not of one particular Jew or Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “both to the Jewish people first and to the Greek people”871:16	u8on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον	1	The phrase **the Jew first** means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that **the Jew** is better or has a high status than **the Greek**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews, who first heard the gospel,”881:16	al16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνι	1	Here, **the Greek** refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew”891:17	of98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because”901:17	wfsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God”911:17	h38h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	Paul speaks about **the righteousness of God** as if it were an object that could be **revealed**. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God”921:17	qr31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form **of God** that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness”931:17	gsl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way in which God causes people to become righteous”941:17	ii3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun **it** here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel”951:17	jl9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν	1	Here, **from faith to faith** describes how **the righteousness of God is revealed**. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, in the way that the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another”961:17	igg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses **just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Habakkuk 2:4](../hab/02/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures”971:17	bgvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote”981:17	oih2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	In this sentence Paul quotes [Habakkuk 2:4](../hab/02/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.991:17	a9y7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	Here, **live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith”1001:17	e7eu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	2	See how you translated **faith** in [1:5](../01/05.md)1011:18	c69s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because”1021:18	r15v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλύπτεται & ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath”1031:18	wzy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment”1041:18	kjen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **ungodliness** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men”1051:18	fz23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, **ungodliness and unrighteousness of men** refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds”1061:18	td8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **unrighteousness** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who, because they do not want to act righteously, keep holding back what is true about God”1071:18	rztp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people”1081:18	g3qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called **men** in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of **men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth”1091:18	k4ql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	Here Paul speaks of **truth** as if it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known”1101:19	jd85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God”1111:19	r6ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, **them**, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout [1:19–32](../01/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people”1121:20	fo6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ & ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ & καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **qualities**, **power**, and **nature**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen”1131:20	szu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθορᾶται	1	Paul uses **seen** to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived”1141:20	abdl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθορᾶται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see”1151:20	uvc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	Paul uses **the world** figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made”1161:20	dr8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the things God has made understand”1171:20	dxr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους	1	**So** indicates that this is a result clause. Use the natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are without excuse” or “This is why they are without excuse”1181:21	pgta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here Paul uses **having known** to imply that these people know about God or know that God exists. He does not mean that they know God personally. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having known about God”1191:21	iasg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν	1	Here, **not glorify him** and **nor give him thanks** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that ungodly people dishonor God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “they completely disregard God”1201:21	c6v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ηὐχαρίστησαν	1	Here Paul speaks of expressions of **thanks** as if they were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did they thank him”1211:21	dant		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they became completely senseless in the way they think”1221:21	xm6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they began to think futile things”1231:21	d2c0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία	1	Here Paul speaks of the **heart** as if it could mentally sense things or could become black in color. He also uses **darkened** to refer to someone losing the ability to understand something. He means that these people lack spiritual sensitivity and are unable to understand spiritual things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “their heart became incapable of feeling or understanding spiritual things”1241:21	t4p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδία	1	Here Paul uses **heart** to refer a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind”1251:21	sw8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρδία	1	The word **heart** is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “hearts”1261:22	ddr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐμωράνθησαν	1	The phrase **they became foolish** is in contrast to what these unrighteous people claimed about themselves in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead they became foolish”1271:22	ly68			ἐμωράνθησαν	1	Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools”1281:23	k9xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, **and** indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish,” as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “; then they” or “Then they”1291:23	x2wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν.	1	Paul uses **exchanged** to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped worshiping God and started worshiping idols that resembled these creatures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternative translation, “; then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” or “Then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things”1301:23	qb7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	The two phrases **the glory of the imperishable God** and **a likeness of an image of perishable man** mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar phrases to emphasize the contrast between **God** and **man**. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas.1311:23	r14e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the imperishable God”1321:23	u971		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between **glory** and **the imperishable God**. This phrase could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “the glory that characterizes the imperishable God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “the glory that belongs only to the imperishable God”1331:23	rfez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος	1	The words translated as **likeness** and **image** were used in the Greek translation of the Old Testament to refer to the same thing ([Genesis 1:26](../gen/01/26.md)). Here Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that **image** is an explanation of **likeness**. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “a likeness, that is, an image”1341:23	osrt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “and likenesses of birds, and likenesses of four-footed animals, and likenesses of creeping things”1351:23	rq7h			τετραπόδων	1	The phrase **four-footed beasts** refers to animals that walk on four feet. Use the most natural form to describe this kind of animal in your language. Alternate translation: “of quadrupeds” or “of four-legged beasts”1361:24	fvv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. **Therefore** here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people rejecting the glory of God, as described in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this”1371:24	ec9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul speaks of these people as if **God** were physically giving them to **lusts**. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God permitted them to become controlled by the lusts of their hearts”1381:24	tlv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **lusts** that come from **their hearts**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the lusts that come from their hearts”1391:24	le2o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md).1401:24	rkou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people indulging in **the lusts of their hearts**. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “, resulting in uncleanness”1411:24	ze8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **uncleanness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to become unclean”1421:24	g0r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	Here Paul uses **uncleanness** to refer to sexual immorality as if it were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure as a result of doing sexually immoral acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “to become sexually immoral”1431:24	puad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι	1	Here, **to dishonor** could refer to: (1) the result of God giving the people **over to their lusts**. Alternate translation: “which results in them dishonoring” (2) the purpose for which **God gave them over to their lusts**. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor”1441:24	a8pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν	1	In this clause Paul uses **dishonor their bodies** figuratively to refer to sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to a shameful act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to commit sexually immoral acts” or “to indulge in sexually immoral activity”1451:25	dv6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει	1	Paul uses **exchanged** to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started believing in idols, which are false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **exchanged** in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternative translation, “these people refused to trust what God says is true and accepted what is false”1461:25	koee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **lie**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God for what is incorrect”1471:25	e9pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **truth** that is about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the truth about God”1481:25	bl7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that these people completely rejected worshiping the true **God**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly worshiped”1491:25	x3t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ κτίσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what was created”1501:25	xrsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τὸν κτίσαντα, ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	This phrase gives further information about **the Creator**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Creator God who is blessed to eternity”1511:25	m8zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	After naming **the Creator**, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed to eternity”1521:25	v1ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εὐλογητὸς	1	Paul is using the adjective **blessed** as a noun in order to describe **the Creator**. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the Blessed One”1531:26	sk6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:24](../01/24.md).1541:26	hw81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πάθη ἀτιμίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **passions** that are characterized by **dishonor**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions”1551:26	lk73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάθη ἀτιμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passions** and **dishonor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by doing what they are passionate about”1561:26	j4ni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	The word translated **for** introduces an explanation of **passions of dishonor**. This explanation begins after the word **for** and continues through the end of the next verse. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is,”1571:26	jqyi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν	1	Paul uses **exchanged** to describe the actions of ungodly women as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped doing **natural** sexual acts with men and started doing sexual acts with other women, which is **contrary to nature**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **exchanged** in [1:23](../01/23.md) and [25](../01/25.md). Alternative translation, “stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing unnatural sexual acts with women”1581:26	vs4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν	1	Paul uses **the natural use** figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and men. This is a polite way of referring to something that would be offensive in some cultures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males”1591:26	qvr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν παρὰ φύσιν	1	Paul uses **contrary to nature** figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and other women. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with other females”1601:27	ji3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες	1	This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to [1:26](../01/26.md). Alternate translation: “in the same way, even the males”1611:27	gn3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφέντες	1	Paul speaks of these men as if they were leaving their location to go to another one. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way God intended for people to do sexual acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having abandoned” or “having rejected”1621:27	g3ja		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας	1	See how you translated **the natural use** in the previous verse.1631:27	qvi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the natural use** that is associated with **the female**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the natural use associated with the female”1641:27	pqpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῆς θηλείας	1	Paul is speaking of these females in general, not of one particular **female**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of females”1651:27	yvm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	Paul speaks of **lust** as if it were something that could burn like a fire. He means that their **lust** is out of control, like a wildly burning fire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other”1661:27	ylj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lust**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “burned lustfully for one another”1671:27	kxwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι	1	This phrase refers to men doing sexual acts with other men. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other”1681:27	u2hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατεργαζόμενοι	1	Paul speaks of men doing unnatural things with each other as if their interaction could produce something, a shameless act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in”1691:27	sjhb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες	1	In the original language the phrase **the penalty** is at the front of the clause for emphasis. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to show that emphasis. Alternate translation: “and the penalty, which was necessary for their perversion, receiving in themselves”1701:27	jtru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is the result of the **shameless acts**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and as a result”1711:27	raet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες	1	Paul speaks of **the penalty** for their sinful activity as if it were something that they could receive inside of themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves”1721:27	x6fz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **penalty**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act”1731:27	dbtt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **perversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which was necessary for their perverted acts”1741:28	bt7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει	1	Here, **having God in their full awareness** is an idiom that refers to thinking about God or acknowledging God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “they did not approve of thinking about God”1751:28	f53x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **full awareness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being fully aware of God” or “fully acknowledging that God exists”1761:28	yy1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:24](../01/24.md) and [26](../01/26.md).1771:28	p8z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν	1	Paul is speaking of the minds of these ungodly people in general, not of one particular **mind**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “to disapproved minds”1781:28	r1pt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν	1	Here, **mind** refers to a person’s will and moral reasoning. The **mind** of one of these ungodly people is **disapproved**, which means that it has been rejected by God as worthless. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a mind that has become worthless”1791:28	ie4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ποιεῖν	1	Here, **to do** could refer to: (1) the result of **a disapproved mind**. Alternate translation: “and as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of **a disapproved mind**. Alternate translation: “so that they do”1801:28	aye6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα	1	The phrase **those things that are not proper** refers to what Paul describes in [1:29–31](../01/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those improper things that follow”1811:29	v0zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ	1	Paul uses **filled with** to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container **filled with** the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that has been **filled with** something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice”1821:29	t4qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένους	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they filled themselves”1831:29	uqks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ;	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness**, **wickedness**, **covetousness**, and **malice**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts”1841:29	a7s3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1	Paul uses **full of** to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container **full of** the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is **full of** something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent”1851:29	dzda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **envy**, **murder**, **strife**, **deceit**, and **evil intent**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things”1861:30	f4tt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας & ἀπειθεῖς	1	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient”1871:30	th8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καταλάλους & ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slanderers** and **inventors**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things”1881:30	qq50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **inventors** who invent **evil things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inventing evil things”1891:31	i7ix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας	1	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless”1901:32	cxx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δικαίωμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **decree**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed”1911:32	ytu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **the righteous decree** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “that what God decrees is right”1921:32	z12q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, **that** indicates that what follows is the content of the **the righteous decree of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely, that” or “in other words, that”1931:32	iqg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτὰ & τοῖς πράσσουσιν	1	The pronouns **such things** and **things** and **them** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–31](../01/28/md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things”1941:32	p9e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄξιοι θανάτου	1	Paul is using the adjective **worthy** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death”1951:32	t0ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die”1961:32	awth		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death”1972:intro	dse2				0	# Romans 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n    * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)\n    * All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)\n\nIn this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “The Law”\n\nIn this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\nIn [2:1–5](../02/01.md) Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])1982:1	y6ts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	**Therefore** here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in [1:18–32](../01/18.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then”1992:1	d7pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	εἶ & κρίνεις & σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις & πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων	1	Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices”2002:1	atxo			ἀναπολόγητος	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:20](../01/20.md).2012:1	md5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	**O man** here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being”2022:1	x3mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἄνθρωπε	1	Here, **man** is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “human being”2032:1	n2mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, **for** introduces a reason clause. In the rest of the verse Paul gives the reasons why **everyone judging** is **without excuse**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since”2042:1	jt4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾧ	1	The word translated **that which** is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that”2052:1	ybp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἕτερον	1	Here, **the other** refers to any other person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “any other person”2062:1	nz11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, **for** introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “this is because”2072:1	wumc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ & αὐτὰ	1	The phrase **the same things** refers to acts for which people judge one another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing”2082:2	jr4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	Here, **we** could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms.2092:2	qca8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the judgment** that **God** does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges”2102:2	kfy1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **judgment** and **truth**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true”2112:2	lfqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts”2122:2	j46f			τοὺς & πράσσοντας	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32/.md).2132:2	mjao		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα	1	Here, **such things** refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things”2142:3	zwg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!”2152:3	jct9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	The pronoun **this** refers to the final clause of this verse **that you will escape from the judgment of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this result”2162:3	ysys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things”2172:3	rk75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	See how you translated this phrase in [2:1](../02/01.md).2182:3	mo4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτά	1	The phrases **such things** and **the same things** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). See how you translated **such things** in [2:2](../02/02.md) and **the same things** in [2:1](../02/01.md).2192:3	bd82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of **judgment** as if it were a person from whom someone could **escape**. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment”2202:3	hpej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in [2:2](../02/02.md).2212:4	pex3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that **the kindness of God leads** them **to repentance**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the wealth of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!”2222:4	v9yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	καταφρονεῖς & σε	1	In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated **you** in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [2:3](../02/03.md).2232:4	w537		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	Paul speaks of God’s **kindness and forbearance and patience** as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience”2242:4	swj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience**, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is”2252:4	pplt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας & τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience** that characterize **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness”2262:4	acip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1	Paul speaks of **the kindness of God** as if it were a person who could lead someone **to repentance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent”2272:4	u0io		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1	Here, **to repentance** is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of **the kindness of God**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to completely change the way you perceive things”2282:4	jamv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετάνοιάν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to fully change the way you perceive things”2292:5	agl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness”2302:5	v6z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν	1	Here, **heart** refers to a person’s will or inner being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent”2312:5	fv4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν	1	Here Paul speaks of **wrath** as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you”2322:5	s7cs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν & ὀργῆς	1	Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md).2332:5	pck0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that both **the day of wrath** and **the revelation of the righteous judgment of God** refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment”2342:5	uz3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **wrath** and by **the revelation of the righteous judgment of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment”2352:5	ay1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath**, **revelation**, and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts, when he reveals how righteously he judges”2362:5	fnpj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the righteous judgment of God** as what **the revelation** reveals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “when God reveals his righteous judgment”2372:5	sume		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the righteous judgment** that is carried out by **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God judging righteously”2382:6	frov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	This clause is a quotation from the Old Testament ([Psalm 62:12](../psa/062/012.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “who ‘will pay back to each one according to his deeds’”2392:6	jwcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses **pay back** to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds”2402:6	gj1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deeds**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does”2412:7	ylpm				0	# General Information:\n\nIn [2:7–10](../02/07.md) Paul explains what he means when he said in [2:6](../02/06.md) that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.”2422:7	rrbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work”2432:7	gec6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back”2442:7	sqdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ζητοῦσιν	1	Paul uses **seeking** to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain **glory and honor and incorruptibility**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain”2452:7	zyff			τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Here, **according to** could indicate: (1) the means by which these people **are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility**. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people **everlasting life**. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life”2462:7	d2gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work”2472:7	ub51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory**, **honor**, and **incorruptibility**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever”2482:8	j1e6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἐριθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ambition**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious”2492:8	fcb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right”2502:8	xhtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	Here Paul speaks of **the truth**as if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and he speaks of **unrighteousness** as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that by **disobeying** him these people reject what God says is true and right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him”2512:8	m7pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ & τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to what is true … to what is unrighteous”2522:8	ytny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the [2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “wrath and anger are what God pays back”2532:8	exor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ	1	Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md).2542:8	wa6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **anger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry”2552:8	blwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	The words **wrath** and **anger** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize God’s intense anger toward people who are **disobedient to the truth**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger”2562:9	ospb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν	1	Paul speaks of **Tribulation and distress** as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every **evil** person will experience **Tribulation and distress**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Every human soul that produces the evil will experience tribulation and distress”2572:9	qonf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Tribulation** and **distress**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Difficult and distressing times”2582:9	u8f7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία	1	These two words mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress”2592:9	ck9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul uses **soul of man** to refer to the whole life of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being”2602:9	msox		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person”2612:9	n7q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ κακόν	1	Paul is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil”2622:9	a9s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος	1	This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person”2632:9	csnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνος	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md).2642:10	i9tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξα & καὶ τιμὴ, καὶ εἰρήνη, παντὶ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor and bring peace to everyone”2652:10	t2od		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, **peace** could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God”2662:10	ib56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	Paul is using the adjective **good** as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good”2672:10	u06j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.2682:11	eol0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **favoritism**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another”2692:12	wkx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows in [2:12–16](../02/12.md) gives the reason for the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because”2702:12	ecsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, whom he calls “the Greek” in [2:9–10](../02/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law”2712:12	t3qs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως & νόμῳ & νόμου	1	The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws”2722:12	m6cy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως	1	Here, **without the law** refers to not knowing God’s **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law”2732:12	qkh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ ἀπολοῦνται	1	Here Paul uses **perish** to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment”2742:12	jwvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law”2752:12	w4cp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law”2762:12	a0k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ νόμου	1	Here, **by** indicates that **the law** is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says”2772:13	sw8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because”2782:13	a8ra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	See how you translated **the law** in the previous verse.2792:13	eg4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ & δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses **with God** here to describe **righteous** people as if they were located in the presence of **God**. He means that God makes them right with himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God”2802:13	c1bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law”2812:14	q2id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that [2:14–16](../02/14.md) give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in [2:12](../02/12.md). [2:14–16](../02/14.md) explain why **Gentiles** who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because”2822:14	vlum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα & νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they do not own or possess **the law**. He means that they did not receive the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law”2832:14	zhmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & τοῦ νόμου & νόμον	1	See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md).2842:14	h53h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φύσει & ποιῶσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **nature**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do”2852:14	atda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the commands within the law”2862:14	symg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος	1	Here Paul speaks of **Gentiles** as if they were **a law**. Paul means that the non-Jewish people have their own rules about what is right and wrong, and their rules are similar to God’s **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law”2872:15	xl6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Paul speaks of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the law of Moses as if they were showing **the work of the law** to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law”2882:15	wtit		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of **the works of the law** as if they can be written on the surfaces of peoples’ hearts. He means that God has enabled non-Jewish people to know generally what is right or wrong even though they do not know the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they know the work of the law”2892:15	x35c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the work** that characterizes obeying **the law**. This phrase has a similar meaning to “the things of the law” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the work that the law requires a person to do”2902:15	v60q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God wrote on their hearts”2912:15	ja5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md).2922:15	jmeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	Paul uses the singular **conscience** figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness”2932:15	z28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	Here Paul speaks of **conscience** as if it were a person **bearing witness** in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true”2942:15	ub8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	συνμαρτυρούσης & καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1	This clause explains what **bearing witness** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them”2952:15	qk53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1	Here Paul speaks of **thoughts** as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think”2962:16	o6kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here, **day** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming”2972:16	c5fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that **the day when God will judge** refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in [2:2](../02/02.md) and [2:5](../02/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges”2982:16	lyvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **secrets** that **men** have. These **secrets** are specifically secret thoughts that people have, as indicated by the word “thoughts” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men’s secrets” or “the secrets that men keep”2992:16	gxet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **secrets**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men secretly think”3002:16	r8hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people”3012:16	xb7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel”3022:16	e9bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1	Paul speaks of the **gospel** as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the **gospel** God has entrusted him to preach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to God’s gospel that I preach”3032:17	lc6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	# Connecting Statement:\n\n**But** here indicates that in [2:17–29](../02/17.md) Paul changes topics from talking about non-Jewish people who don’t know the law of Moses to Jews who know the law. He explains why the Jews as well cannot escape God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However”3042:17	cnq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from this verse to [2:21](../02/21.md). Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because”3052:17	kfe8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	Even though Paul is speaking to Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so **you** and **your** and **yourself** is singular throughout [2:17–27](../02/17.md) unless otherwise noted. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your** and **yourself** in your translation.3062:17	pglg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ	1	Paul speaks of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish”3072:17	gz6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ,	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, which is God’s judgment of sinners. Alternate translation: “rely upon the law to escape God’s judgment” or “rely upon the law to save you from God’s judgment”3082:17	dapj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of **God**. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God”3092:18	xn6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου,	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent”3102:18	qxkt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ θέλημα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills”3112:18	aqbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others having instructed you from the law”3122:19	nk76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι	1	Paul uses the word **yourself** to emphasize how **convinced** the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone are a guide”3132:19	wi7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	Paul uses **guide** to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses **blind** to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are a helper to those separated from God”3142:19	beop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **guide**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can serve as a guide to blind men”3152:19	ql0b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τυφλῶν	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people”3162:19	j76c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁδηγὸν & τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God”3172:19	xlge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1	Here Paul uses **light** to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses **those in darkness** figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a **light** shines on people who are in a dark place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God”3182:20	ymey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children”3192:20	pf6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα & ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children and are the only people who have in the law”3202:20	ar5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διδάσκαλον νηπίων	1	Paul speaks of the non-Jews as if they were **little children**. He means that they are ignorant about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “people who are spiritually ignorant”3212:20	ose0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a physical shape that someone could possess. He means that **the law** contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law how a person can truly know God”3222:20	ua61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	Paul is using the possessive forms **of the knowledge** and **of the truth** to describe the **form** of **the law**. Here, **of knowledge** and **of the truth** could indicate: (1) what **the law** contains. Alternate translation: “the form that contains the knowledge and the truth” (2) what **the law** represents. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth”3232:20	y6i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **knowledge** and ** truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know about God and what is true about God”3242:21	vy0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ οὖν διδάσκων ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις? ὁ κηρύσσων μὴ κλέπτειν, κλέπτεις?	1	In [2:21–23](../02/21.md) Paul transitions from his description of the Jews in [2:17–20](../02/17.md) to a series of rhetorical questions. These questions emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews, who thought they were superior to non-Jews because they knew the law of Moses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then you, who teach another, do not teach yourself! You, who preach not to steal, actually steal!”3252:21	rftq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is the second half of the factual conditional statement that Paul began with “if you name yourself a Jew” in [2:17](../02/17.md). Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. If you divided [2:17–21](../02/17.md) into separate sentences, then you may need to include a short form of the “if” statement here. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” or “since all this is really true, then”3262:21	uq9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἕτερον	1	Here, **another** is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people”3272:21	abq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις	1	Here Paul implies that the Jews need to **teach** themselves, because they do not actually obey the laws that they teach. They live their lives as if they do not know the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you yourself don’t obey the law, do you not teach yourself”3282:22	parm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν, μοιχεύεις? ὁ βδελυσσόμενος τὰ εἴδωλα, ἱεροσυλεῖς?	1	Like in the previous verse, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form twice to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who say not to commit adultery actually commit adultery! You who abhor idols actually rob temples!”3292:22	dmpg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἱεροσυλεῖς	1	Here Paul implies that the **temples** the Jews **rob** are where **idols** are kept and worshiped. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it”3302:23	z80m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου, τὸν Θεὸν ἀτιμάζεις	1	As in the previous two verses, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who boast in the law actually dishonor God through the transgression of the law!”3312:23	grr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι	1	Paul uses **in the law** as if it were something that people could boast inside of. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law, which has similar meaning to “boast in God” in [2:17](../02/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law”3322:23	ob98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgression**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law”3332:24	yp4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’”3342:24	z54i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things that I have said about you are true because”3352:24	lk5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	In this clause Paul quotes part of [Isaiah 52:5](../isa/52/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.3362:24	c4sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the **name** that belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that **God** is a **name**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name”3372:24	mvwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses **the name of God** figuratively to refer to**God** himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST.3382:24	ccm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you”3392:24	m2bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles”3402:24	pg0g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes **the Gentiles** to blaspheme **the name of God**. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave”3412:24	e144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here, **you** is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural **you** in [2:17–27](../02/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people”3422:24	edrf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote”3432:24	end9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md).3442:25	vdu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that [2:25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in [2:12](../02/12.md). Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because”3452:25	vp6o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴ & ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised”3462:25	wm24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὠφελεῖ	1	Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you”3472:25	pqhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	παραβάτης νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law”3482:25	xq62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	Here, **your circumcision becomes uncircumcision** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to **practice the law**. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s **law** is no longer physically circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you were not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised”3492:26	vt7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν οὖν	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for **the uncircumcised one** who **keeps the requirements of the law**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s suppose then that”3502:26	r9i4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἡ ἀκροβυστία	1	Paul is using the adjective **uncircumcision** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the one who is uncircumcised”3512:26	nf3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	φυλάσσῃ	1	Here, **keeps** is an idiom that refers to obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is obedient to”3522:26	mkhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **requirements** found in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements”3532:26	be71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what **the law** requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision”3542:26	rjb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision”3552:26	gjuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ & περιτομὴν	1	See how you translated **uncircumcision** and **circumcision** in the previous verse.3562:27	lqz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge”3572:27	tpno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἡ & ἀκροβυστία	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse.3582:27	h2lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **nature**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised”3592:27	zwh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τελοῦσα	1	Here, **fulfilling** is an idiom that refers to fully obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “is fully obedient to”3602:27	sv4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς	1	Here, **through** could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the **letter and circumcision**. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the **letter and circumcision**. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision”3612:27	nxa1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	Paul is describing **the law** by association with the letters that make up **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law”3622:27	lkll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς	1	See how you translated **circumcision** in the previous two verses.3632:27	q795		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for **transgressor**, you could express the idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law”3642:28	g2vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in [2:25–27](../02/25.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly”3652:28	lfuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖός	1	Here Paul uses **Jew** to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, as Abraham did. **Jew** here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew”3662:28	rohy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ φανερῷ	1	Here, **visibly** refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals”3672:28	n34i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ & περιτομή	1	Here Paul uses **circumcision** to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../jer/04/04.md)). Here, **circumcision** does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision”3682:28	s44m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	Paul uses **the flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body”3692:29	b6ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος	1	The word translated **secretly** refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others”3702:29	u7b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖος	1	Here Paul uses **Jew** in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse.3712:29	d1go		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **circumcision** that is performed in **the heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change”3722:29	hbiv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1	The phrase **circumcision of the heart** is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, just as circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../jer/04/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belongs to God’s people by removal of sin”3732:29	n4pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδίας	1	See how you translated this word in [1:21](../01/21.md).3742:29	ffa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι	1	Here, both occurrences of **in** indicate the means by which something happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter”3752:29	kjc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι	1	Here, **the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting **in** to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit”3762:29	gcoq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματι	1	See how you translated **letter** in [2:27](../02/27.md).3772:29	dlac		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος	1	The pronoun **whose** refers to **the one who is inwardly a Jew**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that inward Jew’s praise”3782:29	qa6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος	1	Paul is using the possessive form **whose** to indicate who receives **the praise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his praise”3792:29	r4gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “from people”3803:intro	y2kb				0	# Romans 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n    * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)\n    * All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)\n    * Everyone has sinned (3:9–20)\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n    * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)\n    * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses [10–18](../03/10.md) of this chapter, which are quotations from the Old Testament.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nIn [3:1–9](../03/01.md) and [27–31](../03/27.md) Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. You may need to indicate that Paul is asking these questions as if he were a non-Christian Jew responding to these arguments. When Paul asks the rhetorical questions, he is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. When Paul answers those questions, he is speaking as himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this change in speakers with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])3813:1-9	v788				0	# Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [3:1–9](../03/01.md) Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that both “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.”3823:1	a1l0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [2:28–29](../02/28.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what is”3833:1	dawv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς?	1	This verse contains two rhetorical questions connected by **or**. Paul is not asking for information, but here he is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [2:28–29](../02/28.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the Jew certainly has no advantage, and circumcision certainly has no benefit!”3843:1	b7ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς	1	In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.3853:1	bjfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **advantage** or **benefit**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew advantageous, or how is being circumcised beneficial”3863:1	h4h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ Ἰουδαίου	1	Paul is using the possessive form **of the Jew** to describe for whom there is **the advantage**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the Jew”3873:1	l79f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς περιτομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form **of the circumcision** to describe from where **the benefit** comes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised”3883:2	eq3o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’”3893:2	rri9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision are great in every way”3903:2	kzlh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	**Great in every way** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways”3913:2	f2fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν & ὅτι	1	Here, **indeed first, that** could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that”3923:2	mrej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God”3933:2	jkgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, **the sayings of God** could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God recorded in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures”3943:2	qide		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the possessive form **of God** could refer to: (1) **sayings** that came from **God**. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) **says** that are about **God**. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God”3953:3	d9k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then”3963:3	mclv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!”3973:3	fd0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1	In this verse Paul is speaking as if he himself were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.3983:3	i36p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τινες	1	The pronoun **some** refers to some Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people”3993:3	pkae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unfaithfulness** or **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it”4003:3	moq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the faithfulness** that characterizes **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the faithfulness that characterizes God”4013:4	djn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’”4023:4	z465		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	**May it never be** is an exclamation that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not”4033:4	kz4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	**Instead** here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However”4043:4	ld9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	γινέσθω & ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής	1	Here, **let God be true** is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true”4053:4	nud9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **liar**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies”4063:4	fesk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar”4073:4	hfdf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person”4083:4	te39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md).4093:4	b8gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote”4103:4	f0oq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 51:4](../psa/051/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4113:4	xli0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅπως	1	**So that** indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in [Psalm 51:4](../psa/051/004.md), which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin”4123:4	h0ne		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	In this sentence, **you** and **your** refer to God and are singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST.4133:4	lnnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῇς & ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you”4143:4	tj8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου	1	Paul records David using **words** to describe the things that God said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say”4153:5	gw3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. **But** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if”4163:5	putf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4173:5	hjyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν?	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say”4183:5	y6vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἐροῦμεν	1	Here, **our** and **we** are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say”4193:5	y0r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness** or **righteousness**, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is”4203:5	ho67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!”4213:5	v30z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!”4223:5	e9ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν	1	Here Paul uses **imposing his wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s anger, which is carried out by judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of **wrath** in [1:18](../01/18.md).4233:5	j631		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge **the righteousness of God**. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as seen in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being”4243:5	sd4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	Here, the phrase **according to men** is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning”4253:6	gd5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this in [3:4](../03/04.md).4263:6	zg9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1	Here Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing his wrath,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Because if God were unrighteous, how would he judge the world”4273:6	x1y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1	In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using his question to emphasize that **God** could not **judge the world** if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly could not judge the world!”4283:6	lnp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	Here Paul uses **world** to refer to the people who live in the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world”4293:7-9	htfa				0	# General Information:\n\nIn [3:7–9](../03/07.md), Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in [3:6](../03/06.md). A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument.4303:7	b9k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	**But** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in [3:5](../03/05.md).4313:7	c2u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my lie abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner”4323:7	xysz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie”4333:7	j9ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is”4343:7	lbji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the truth** that characterizes **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness”4353:7	fa7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι & κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	Here Paul uses **my** and **I** to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners”4363:7	o3po		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lie**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie”4373:7	je41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, **to** indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified”4383:7	h61j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him”4393:7	yv5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!”4403:7	iiqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔτι κἀγὼ & κρίνομαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God keep on judging me”4413:7	pgus		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sinner**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful”4423:8	vw1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	**And** here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in [3:6](../03/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition”4433:8	kb9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά?	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?”4443:8	wr3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ μὴ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say”4453:8	pr4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ & ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά	1	In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here (“And why not say”) to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’”4463:8	o3pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν	1	Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things”4473:8	veic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	βλασφημούμεθα & ἡμᾶς	1	When Paul says **we** and **us**, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us”4483:8	klaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βλασφημούμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us”4493:8	vbpa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things”4503:8	pe2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	Paul is saying this as an aside to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” are the ones who deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses as in the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside.4513:8	re0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	The pronoun **whose** here refers to the people who slander Paul by claiming that he teaches people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the judgment of those who say this is just”4523:8	g87e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are justly judged” or “whom God justly judges”4533:9	z3wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν? προεχόμεθα?	1	Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase **What then** he used to begin this discussion. See how you translated this phrase in [3:1](../03/01.md).4543:9	y6uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	προεχόμεθα?	1	Paul is using the question form to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul has said previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely we are not better off!”4553:9	ajj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προεχόμεθα	1	Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off”4563:9	g85q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐ πάντως	1	**Not at all** is an exclamation that communicates a strong negative response to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!”4573:9	cbgq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ πάντως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We are not better off at all”4583:9	a01e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	προῃτιασάμεθα γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “We are not better off because we have already accused”4593:9	qvjy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προῃτιασάμεθα	1	Here, **we** could mean: (1) Paul is speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I have already accused” (2) Paul is speaking of himself and other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians have already accused” See how you translated **we** in the previous verse.4603:9	hgs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνας	1	Here, **Greeks** refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “non-Jewish people”4613:9	x4eb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν	1	The phrase **under sin** is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “unable to stop sinning”4623:10	u88n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md).4633:10	zkzr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as the prophets wrote”4643:10	ju1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:3](../psa/014/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4653:10	yt5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not even one** person is **righteous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous”4663:10	bscu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	Paul is using the singular adjectives **none righteous** and **one** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person”4673:11	b0m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:2](../psa/014/002.md) and [Psalm 53:3](../psa/053/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4683:11	kqs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν & οὐκ ἔστιν	1	Paul is using the adjectives **none** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no man … There are no man” or “There is no person … There is no person”4693:11	h9e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων	1	Here, **who understands** refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise”4703:11	mn84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1	Here, Paul quotes David using **seeks** to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God”4713:12	lg0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	This sentence is quotation of [Psalm 14:3](../psa/014/003.md) and [Psalm 53:4](../psa/053/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4723:12	cen3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέκλιναν	1	Paul quotes David using **turned away** to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refused to live the way God requires”4733:12	a72h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν	1	Here, **useless** implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they benefit neither God nor humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone”4743:12	na87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not even one** type of person can continually do **kindness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one is doing kindness”4753:12	v9ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ & ἑνός	1	See how you translated **none** and **one** in [3:10](../03/10.md).4763:12	b3g1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kindness**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind”4773:13	xr4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν	1	These two sentences are a quotation from [Psalm 5:10](../psa/005/010.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4783:13	c7rh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging”4793:13	nmrs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular **throat**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Each of their throats”4803:13	sx6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using **throat** to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say”4813:13	bbq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes David using **opened grave** to describe these people’s **throat** as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their words express moral corruption”4823:13	pemg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using **tongues** to describe something people would say to deceive someone, using their tongues to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say”4833:13	d82g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 140:3](../psa/140/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4843:13	b4bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **poison** that comes from **asps**, which are venomous snakes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison”4853:13	qk16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	Paul quotes David using **poison of asps** to refer to what people say as if what they say contained **poison**. He means that the things they say harm people as does deadly venom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people”4863:13	u40o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using **lips** to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their **lips** to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is in what they say”4873:14	ucnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 10:7](../psa/010/007.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4883:14	ujjd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ στόμα	1	Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular **mouth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “speech”4893:14	sqr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὧν τὸ στόμα	1	Here Paul quotes David using **mouth** to describe people speaking curses and bitter things by using their **mouth** to say them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they say” or "whose speech"4903:14	j0sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1	Paul quotes David using **cursing and bitterness** as if these concepts were things with which people could fill or load their **mouth**. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others”4913:15-17	e67d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks		0	# General Information:\n\nVerses 15–17 are Paul’s paraphrase of [Isaiah 59:7–8](../isa/59/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4923:15	vds1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using **feet**, a part of the human body, to refer to the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These people”4933:15	quph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκχέαι αἷμα	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using **pour out blood** to refer to violently murdering people, which usually causes blood to come out of the people who are murdered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to murder others”4943:16	bc96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Destruction** and **suffering**, you could express the same ideas with other expressions. Alternate translation: “Demolishing lives and making people suffer”4953:16	rrgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	Here, **ways** is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave”4963:17	zbrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁδὸν	1	See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse.4973:17	jb6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁδὸν εἰρήνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a way** that is characterized by **peace**. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave”4983:18	wr0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 36:1](../psa/036/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.4993:18	bx27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fear**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “There are no fearful feelings about God before their eyes”5003:18	frt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	φόβος Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **fear** that people should feel toward for **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” or “fear about God”5013:18	m89o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	Here,**before their eyes** is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds”5023:19	lrdp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	**Now** here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about **the law** and “the righteousness of God” in [3:1–9](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed”5033:19	gc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know”5043:19	e8h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει & λαλεῖ	1	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks”5053:19	n399		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ νόμος & τῷ νόμῳ	1	Here Paul uses **the law** to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in [3:10–18](../03/10.md) Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures”5063:19	b0g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	Paul uses **those with the law** to refer to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law”5073:19	end8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what **the law says**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that”5083:19	cy5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ	1	Here, **every mouth may be shut** is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God, because everyone has sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human being can excuse himself”5093:19	js71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φραγῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking”5103:19	w12y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶς ὁ κόσμος	1	Paul uses**all the world** figuratively to refer to **all** the people living in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world”5113:19	wwq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπόδικος γένηται & τῷ Θεῷ	1	The phrase **may become accountable to God** means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “may fall under God's judgment of guilt”5123:20	ezbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1	Here. **because** introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result,”5133:20	vzot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous”5143:20	xs9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σὰρξ	1	Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being”5153:20	d6vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου & διὰ & νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	In this verse Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them **full awareness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law”5163:20	w5qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md).5173:20	i7zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	In this verse **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md).5183:20	llh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	Here, **before him** is an idiom meaning “in his presence.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence”5193:20	xgpp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **full awareness** and **sin**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful”5203:20	aety		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **full awareness** about the **sin** a person has committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin”5213:20	jdw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ & νόμου	1	Here, **through law** indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law”5223:21	fqz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	**But now** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about **the law** in [2:1–3:20](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now”5233:21	y3te		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law”5243:21	e5ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμου & τοῦ νόμου	1	While the first occurrence of **the law** in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this difference by using **the law** and **the Law** respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws that God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote”5253:21	nlj0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς νόμου	1	Here, **apart from the law** could mean: (1) **apart from** doing what **the law** requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what **the law** says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says”5263:21	e4qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness”5273:21	qkis		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md).5283:21	gvca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Law and the Prophets bearing witness”5293:21	tnf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here Paul uses **the Law and the Prophets** as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this”5303:21	bgyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, **the Law and the Prophets**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures”5313:22	pec5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, **but** indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even”5323:22	cvhy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.5333:22	q4m1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **faith in Jesus Christ** is a possessive form that indicates **faith** that is associated with **Jesus Christ**. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is”5343:22	c4mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τοὺς πιστεύοντας	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation”5353:22	o6qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, **for** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why **the righteousness of God** is **for all those who believe**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “because”5363:22	daa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολή	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial”5373:23	x1hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that”5383:23	akn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Here Paul uses the adjective **all** as a noun that refers to **all** the people who have ever existed or ever will exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people”5393:23	jbe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of **all** people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain **the glory of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God”5403:23	vwsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the possessive form **the glory of God** could refer to: (1) the glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned. Alternate translation: “the glory God once gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God”5413:24	ibi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι	1	Here Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a person who could **justify** someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people righteous as a gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious”5423:24	evs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν	1	Paul assumes that his readers know that those who are **being justified freely** are “all” those who “have sinned” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all people are being freely justified”5433:24	jgcu			δωρεὰν	1	Alternate translation: “as a gift” or “without payment”5443:24	atij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **redemption**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “by God being gracious through redeeming them in Christ Jesus” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them”5453:24	hyeb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπολυτρώσεως	1	The word translated as **redemption** refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin”5463:24	lno6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, Paul speaks of **redemption** as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus”5473:25	ci0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον	1	Here Paul uses **presented** as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was **presented** to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity”5483:25	t2d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως & εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **propitiation**, **faith**, **demonstration**, or **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous”5493:25	m159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι	1	Here Paul uses **his blood** to refer to Jesus’ death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death”5503:25	ieq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	Here, **for** indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God **presented** Jesus as **a propitiation**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to demonstrate his righteousness”5513:25	ze9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in [1:17](../01/17.md).5523:25	siri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν τῶν & ἁμαρτημάτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **overlooking**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because he overlooked the sins”5533:25	ydoj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “how they had sinned previously”5543:26	b2f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν	1	Here, **in** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason for God “overlooking of the sins that happened previously,” as stated in the previous verse. Starting a new sentence, use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is”5553:26	lm1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **forbearance**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God forbears”5563:26	cg55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as being characterized by **forbearance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in God’s forbearance”5573:26	b1xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.5583:26	v1c9			ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ	1	Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently”5593:26	jjwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates **his righteousness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be”5603:26	x6cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul is speaking of all people who have **faith in Jesus**, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who is from faith in Jesus” or “every person who trusts in Jesus”5613:26	qdkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who is characterized by **faith in Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is characterized by faith in Jesus”5623:26	ab0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:22](../03/22.md).5633:27-31	emwi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		0	# Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [3:27–31](../03/27.md) Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that God alone makes people righteous through faith in Jesus. Like in [3:1–9](../03/01.md), Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew when he asks the rhetorical questions, but he is speaking as himself when he answers those questions.5643:27	e0wc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [3:21–26](../03/21.md). If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, inserting a parenthetical phrase between commas. Alternate translation: “, if it is God who makes people righteous through faith in Jesus,”5653:27	fjm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in [3:21–26](../03/21.md). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There then is no grounds for boasting!”5663:27	mvs0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1	Here Paul speaks of **boasting** as if it were an object that could be in a location. He means that no one can boast, because only God makes people righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then can anyone boast”5673:27	pub7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boasting**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast”5683:27	px29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξεκλείσθη	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’”5693:27	eufl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλείσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it”5703:27	v3ut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? & διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person is made righteous through a law of faith”5713:27	dpny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in [3:21–26](../03/21.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!”5723:27	bgyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ἔργων?	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that is characterized by **works**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?”5733:27	h9wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’”5743:27	tg79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐχί	1	**No!** is an exclamation that communicates a strong contrast to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Not at all!”5753:27	ynz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that is characterized by **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through a law characterized by faith” or “by doing what faith requires”5763:27	mlcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God”5773:28	qe9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,”5783:28	jtqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λογιζόμεθα	1	Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in [3:9](../03/09.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard”5793:28	t8um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person”5803:28	ph88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦσθαι & ἄνθρωπον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous”5813:28	jb14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus”5823:28	ycx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to refer to **the works** that God requires in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires”5833:29	hdbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	**Or** here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say”5843:29	ineu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles”5853:29	m8eo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν & ἐθνῶν	1	See how you translated **Gentiles** in [1:5](../01/05.md).5863:29	ch7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!”5873:29	rq5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’”5883:29	gp74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ναὶ	1	**Yes** is an exclamation that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!”5893:30	vur7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ	1	Paul uses **if** as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation, (without either comma preceding): “Since we know” or “Because it is true that”5903:30	qdiu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἴπερ	1	This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation: “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed”5913:30	ux30		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	Paul speaks of **God** as if he were a number. He means that **God** is the **one** and only true **God** for both Jews and Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God”5923:30	rjxp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	This phrase gives further information about **who** our **God** is. It is not making a distinction between the one true **God** and false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and he will justify the uncircumcision through the same faith”5933:30	kw62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	The words **circumcision** and **uncircumcision** are singular nouns that refer to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people”5943:30	gk5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	Here Paul uses **the circumcision** to refer to the Jews by associating them with **circumcision**, and he uses **the uncircumcision** figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with **uncircumcision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people”5953:30	s9i4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐκ πίστεως & διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:26](../03/26.md).5963:31	vj40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, **then** indicates that this sentence is the response that a Jew might have made to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’”5973:31	y6qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!”5983:31	nzr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews on whose behalf Paul is speaking. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify”5993:31	cw0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, **nullify the law** means to make **the law** useless or no longer applicable to anyone. Paul is stating that the Jews might worry that he is teaching that the law of Moses does not have any function at all because God makes people righteous by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do we make the law useless” or “Do we throw away the law”6003:31	aj6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.6013:31	pjgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο! ἀλλὰ νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	In these two sentences Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be! Instead, we establish the law’”6023:31	rhy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md).6033:31	ppvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	Here, **we** is used exclusively to refer to Paul and other Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Christians uphold the law”6043:31	c295		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	Paul uses **uphold** to refer to **the law** as if it were an object that people could hold up high. The meaning of **uphold** here is the opposite meaning of **nullify**, used earlier in the verse. It could mean: (1) Christians fulfill the requirements of the law by trusting in Jesus, who fulfilled the law for them. Alternate translation: “we fulfill the law by faith” (2) Christians value **the law** and affirm that it is useful. Alternative translation: “we confirm that the law is useful” or “we affirm that the law has value”6054:intro	f9jc				0	# Romans 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n    * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)\n    * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)\n    * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [4:7–8](../04/07.md) of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The purpose of the law of Moses\n\nIn this chapter Paul continues to develop his argument based on what he wrote in the previous chapter. He explains how God made Abraham, the ancestor of all Jews, righteous a long time before God gave the law of Moses to the Jews. Even Abraham could not become righteous by what he did. Rather, God made Abraham righteous on the basis of Abraham’s faith. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person righteous. People have always become righteous only by faith. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Circumcision\n\nCircumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, being circumcised never made anyone righteous. In this chapter Paul uses “circumcision” to refer to Jews and “uncircumcision” to refer to non-Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nIn [4:1](../04/01.md), [3](../04/03.md), and [9–10](../04/09.md) Paul continues using rhetorical questions like he did in the previous chapter. He does this in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying.6064:1-12	q7wc				0	# Connecting Statement:\n\n[4:1–12](../04/01.md) are a series of rhetorical questions and answers that Paul uses to emphasize that even **Abraham**, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made righteous by God “through faith.”6074:1	gxv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [3:27–31](../03/27.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md).6084:1	gw29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [3:27–31](../03/27.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, has surely discovered something!”6094:1	rhrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?	1	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.6104:1	s4b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν	1	In [4:1–9](../04/01.md) Paul uses **we** exclusively to speak of himself and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we Jews say”6114:1	ot88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh”6124:1	fk5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	See how you translated **according to the flesh** in [1:3](../01/03.md).6134:2	pmua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1	These clauses continue the the statements that an unbelieving Jew might make against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation.6144:2	ka9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason for the statement in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because”6154:2	oe12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST.6164:2	wvmh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ & ἐδικαιώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself”6174:2	sibe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων	1	Paul assumes that his readers would understand that **works**means “works of the law” as in [3:28](../03/28.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people”6184:2	mefy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν	1	In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’”6194:2	me3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν.	1	What follows the word **but** here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however, not from God’s perspective!”6204:2	z9wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς Θεόν	1	Paul speaks of **Abraham** as if he were located in the presence of **God**. He means that Abraham could not **boast** to God about his **righteousness** if it was **righteous by works**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective”6214:3	w9i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because”6224:3	hih3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says”6234:3	g1wz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses **say** as if **the scripture** were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture”6244:3	r9te		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?	1	Here Paul uses **what does the scripture say** to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture”6254:3	xdtx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Here, **the scripture** refers specifically to the quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md) that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis”6264:3	smc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God credited it to him as righteousness”6274:3	az65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη	1	The pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that **Abraham believed God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was credited” or “his trust in God was credited”6284:3	qked		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God”6294:4	ihul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	**Now** here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,”6304:4	oojx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τῷ & ἐργαζομένῳ	1	Here, **the one who works** refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (See: [4:2](../04/02.md)). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here.6314:4	dsl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace”6324:4	xo4x			κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1	Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation”6334:4	ossx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **obligation**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “as something gifted … as something owed”6344:5	ynp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	**Now** here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But”6354:5	j3ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ & μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ	1	Here, **the one who does not work** refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws”6364:5	fezj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν δικαιοῦντα	1	Here, **the one who justifies** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous”6374:5	tovp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸν ἀσεβῆ	1	Paul is using the singular adjective phrase **the ungodly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things”6384:5	va3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “God credited his faith as righteousness”6394:5	s00l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being righteous” or “how he trusts in God … as being right with God”6404:6	hil6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	Paul uses **David also speaks of** here to introduce a scripture quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md), which David wrote. This occurs in [4:7–8](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “David also wrote in the Old Testament of”6414:6	s0v1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessedness**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the man is”6424:6	vyse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the man** that is characterized by **blessedness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the blessed man” or “the happy man”6434:6	x40j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of a person”6444:6	c6zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων	1	This phrase gives further information about the **the man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God credits as righteous apart from works”6454:6	lilj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “counts being righteous” or “counts being right with himself”6464:6	o260		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:28](../03/28.md).6474:7	zqwl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	This verse is the beginning of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation.6484:7	dur6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how **Blessed** these people are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins”6494:7	lq4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὧν & αἱ ἀνομίαι & ὧν & αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **lawless deeds** and **sins**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed”6504:7	d4f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφέθησαν & ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers”6514:7	hj2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered”6524:7	hqfm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1	Paul quotes David using **covered** to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven”6534:8	jjov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation.6544:8	yox7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1	This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul says the same thing here in a slightly different way to emphasize how **Blessed** people are whom God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!”6554:8	kpfe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἀνὴρ	1	Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person”6564:8	y21b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds”6574:8	jdrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ λογίσηται	1	Paul quotes David using **count** to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard”6584:8	yxh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never”6594:9	qtgb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	**Then** here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [4:6–8](../04/06.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,”6604:9	g4f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!”6614:9	alrb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος	1	Here, **this blessedness** refers to the joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in [4:6–8](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God”6624:9	jmym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν & ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1	Paul speaks of **blessedness** as if it were an object that could be put **upon** someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision”6634:9	dn7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν περιτομὴν & τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1	See how you translated these words in [3:30](../03/30.md).6644:9	mrsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed, ”6654:9	w2xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1	Here Paul uses **we** exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say”6664:9	o51f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγομεν	1	Paul uses **we say** here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md), which Moses wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament”6674:9	m3uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated the similar clauses in [4:3](../04/03.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md).6684:10	trz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was credited to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was credited to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!”6694:10	unuf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1	Here, **then** introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “How, as a result,” or “So then, how”6704:10	uj5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πῶς	1	**How** here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances”6714:10	bw38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη & οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ	1	In this verse the pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith credited … His faith was not in circumcision”6724:10	p5rp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God credit it”6734:10	wbta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it credited being in circumcision, or was it credited being in uncircumcision? It was not credited in circumcision, but it was credited in uncircumcision”6744:10	zj6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised”6754:11	unmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς & ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ & δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised”6764:11	d564		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σημεῖον & περιτομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the sign** that is **circumcision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision”6774:11	rjhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	This phrase gives further information about **the sign of circumcision**. Circumcision is not only a **sign**, but also a **seal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision”6784:11	wm54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a seal** that proves **the righteousness** to be real. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness”6794:11	n31z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that comes from **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him”6804:11	zlwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	This clause gives further information about **the faith** that Abraham had. Paul is referring to **the faith** that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had in his uncircumcision”6814:11	mob7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here Paul speaks of **uncircumcision** as if it were a location someone could be **in**. He means that Abraham was in the state of being uncircumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while he was uncircumcised”6824:11	f5vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that he would be”6834:11	ue6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	Paul uses **father** to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced **all those who believe** in God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of all those who believe through uncircumcision” or “like the father of all those who believe through uncircumcision”6844:11	etyl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	Here the word translated as **through** refers to going through a time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “during uncircumcision” or “throughout the time they were uncircumcised”6854:11	hm61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, **so that** indicates that this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being **the father of all those who believe**. Alternate translation: “in order that the righteousness would be credited to them” (2) the result of Abraham being **the father of all those who believe**. Alternate translation: “resulting in the righteousness being credited to them”6864:11	y88e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated **counted** in [4:3–5](../04/03.md) and [9–10](../04/09.md).6874:11	ehib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God”6884:12	v9bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς	1	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision”6894:12	u8j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πατέρα περιτομῆς τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul uses **father of circumcision** to indicate that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people who believe in Jesus. They are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in [2:29](../02/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in his uncircumcision”6904:12	krkf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are **not only** circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same **faith** in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision”6914:12	s9jt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, **follow in the steps** is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham”6924:12	btrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the faith** that **our father Abraham** had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith”6934:12	u5ur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, **our** refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in [3:9](../03/09.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham”6944:12	ykdc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here, **in uncircumcision** has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there.6954:13	i6xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in [4:11–12](../04/11.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that”6964:13	e0a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐπαγγελία & τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι κόσμου	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **promise** and **heir**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit the world”6974:13	yqxx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Here, the world translated **or** indicates that **the promise** is **to Abraham** and **his seed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also”6984:13	ew13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses **seed** to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants”6994:13	ct1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	Here **the world** could refer to: (1) all the land of **the world**. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world”7004:13	pjyt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & διὰ νόμου & ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Here the word translated as **through** indicates the means by which God gave **the promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness”7014:13	kquo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμου	1	See how you translated **the law** in [3:21](../03/21.md).7024:13	iqsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνης πίστεως	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:11](../04/11.md).7034:14	hba4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that [4:14–15](../04/14.md) give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that”7044:14	n0x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied”7054:14	ksui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι & ἡ πίστις & ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	See how you translated “heir”, **the law**, and **faith** in the previous verse.7064:14	k4ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κληρονόμοι	1	Here, **heirs** refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are”7074:14	w977		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι	1	Here, **from the law** refers to those who try to obey the law of Moses so that God will count them as righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law so that God will count them as righteous”7084:14	hxvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1	Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that **faith** would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeying**the law** allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God”7094:15	v1ow		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that”7104:15	qma4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ & νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the **law** causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it”7114:15	h1x1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1	See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md).7124:15	px0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις	1	Paul speaks of **the law** and **transgression** as if they were located in a specific place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist”7134:15	t0wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παράβασις	1	See how you translated the same use of **transgression** in [2:23](../02/23.md).7144:16	defl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, **it** refers to **the promise** mentioned later in the verse and introduced in [4:13](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise is by faith”7154:16	nchm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, **by faith** indicates the means by which someone acquires **the promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by faith”7164:16	bc5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes **faith** the means for acquiring **the promise**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that”7174:16	fvax			κατὰ χάριν	1	Alternate translation: “by grace” or “on the basis of grace”7184:16	cgpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάριν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is”7194:16	v8it		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	Here, **so that** could indicate: (1) a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for the promise to be certain” (2) a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result that the promise might be certain”7204:16	qalp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	See how you translated **promise** in [4:13](../04/13.md).7214:16	r8ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι	1	The phrase **all the seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants”7224:16	xzsp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι	1	See how you translated **seed** in [4:13](../04/13.md).7234:16	a4ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	These clauses give further information about the phrase **all the seed**. They distinguish between **the seed** associated with **the law** and **the seed** associated with **the faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law and those associated with the faith of Abraham”7244:16	ns6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	See how you translated this phrase in [4:14](../04/14.md).7254:16	qctv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, **from the faith of Abraham** refers to those who trust in God the way Abraham did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who has the same faith as Abraham”7264:16	welr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Paul uses **father** to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all of us who believe”7274:16	kd6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Here, **us all** refers to **all the seed** and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God”7284:17	nuj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	Here Paul interrupts the sentence he began in the previous verse and inserts these two clauses in order to support his argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mark these clauses in a way that shows they are inserted into the middle of a sentence, as in the UST. You could also move these clauses to the end of the verse so that they do not divide the main sentence.7294:17	ibwm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures, which say”7304:17	iju4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md).7314:17	sjm0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote”7324:17	peaf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	In this clause Paul quotes [Genesis 17:5](../gen/17/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.7334:17	mxm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τέθεικά σε & ἐπίστευσεν	1	The pronoun **I** refers to **God**, and **you** and **he** refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted”7344:17	n6l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Paul quotes God using **father** to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise **many nations**. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large number of people from **many nations** who trust in God as does Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people”7354:17	ph37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,	1	Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted”7364:17	ifwu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατέναντι & Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses **in the presence of** to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with **God**. Paul means that **God** personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from **many nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view”7374:17	s67j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὗ ἐπίστευσεν & τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1	These clauses give further information about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing”7384:17	tg2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1	Paul speaks of **the things not existing** as if **God** were calling to them. Paul means that **God** creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in [Genesis 1:3–27](../gen/01/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking, creates things that did not previously exist”7394:18	emih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & αὐτὸν & σου	1	The pronouns **who** and **he** and **your** refer to Abraham, not God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly.7404:18	g8fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	Here, **against hope** is an idiom meaning “despite what seemed hopeless.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope”7414:18	auah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless”7424:18	n62i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised”7434:18	bs6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν	1	Here, **so that** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing **on the basis of hope**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming”7444:18	qbdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [4:17](../04/17.md).7454:18	b92q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	Here Paul uses **what was said** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:5](../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures”7464:18	cryi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said”7474:18	p5el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου	1	Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting ([Genesis 15:5](../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be”7484:18	i2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ σπέρμα	1	See how you translated **seed** in [4:16](../04/16.md).7494:19	ycte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith”7504:19	m9gq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “And being strengthened in the faith” of "And being strong in the faith"7514:19	s6u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks of Abraham’s **faith** as if it were something in which a person could be **weakening**. He means that Abraham kept trusting God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not ceasing to trust”7524:19	b3w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God”7534:19	bn9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤδη νενεκρωμένον	1	Paul speaks of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was **dead**. Paul means that Abraham knew he was too old to produce a child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “unable to father a child” or “useless for procreating”7544:19	bfsr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων	1	Here Paul provides background information about Abraham’s age to help his readers understand why Abraham **considered his own body as already being dead**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “since he was about 100 years old”7554:19	hro2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he also considered the deadness of the womb of Sarah”7564:19	ghhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deadness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that the womb of Sarah was dead”7574:19	qil5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Paul speaks of Sarah’s **womb** as if it were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “that Sarah could not bear children”7584:19	yx92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead”7594:20	qn5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised”7604:20	kicf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	**But** here indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s **faith** in **the promise of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nonetheless," or “In fact,”7614:20	o3zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word translated as **toward** could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God”7624:20	qcod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the promise** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God”7634:20	wgmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen”7644:20	ep2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	Here, **did not waver** and **unbelief** form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in believing” or “his belief did not waver”7654:20	th2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unbelief** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting”7664:20	zdj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith”7674:20	a4g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks of Abraham’s **faith** as if it were something in which a person could be **strengthened**. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting”7684:20	ew3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God”7694:21	y2sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληροφορηθεὶς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him”7704:21	plbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπήγγελται & ἐστιν	1	The pronoun **he** refers to God, not Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is”7714:21	j12r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ ἐπήγγελται	1	Here, **what he had promised** refers to the promise Paul describes in [4:13](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham”7724:22	ympp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1	Here, **therefore** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why”7734:22	wlnh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations.7744:22	i56a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated this in [4:3](../04/03.md).7754:23	zdc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was credited to him,’ was not written only for his sake”7764:23	r65c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ	1	The pronouns **his** and **him** refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him”7774:23	bfiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake”7784:23	bmlm			δι’ αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him”7794:23	ae1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,	1	This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations.7804:23	jft0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse.7814:24	pfc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, **our** and **whom** refer to all **those who believe** in **Jesus**. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be credited, to us who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all”7824:24	ffdm			δι’ ἡμᾶς	1	See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse.7834:24	nh4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is about to credit it”7844:24	bu1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μέλλει	1	Here the pronoun **it** refers to the “faith” mentioned in [4:5](../04/05) and [4:20](../04/20). Previously **it** referred to Abraham’s faith, but in this verse **it** refers to **our** faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our faith is about”7854:24	mujr			λογίζεσθαι	1	See how you translated **credited** in the previous verse.7864:24	artt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	This clause refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones”7874:24	i6vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν	1	Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again”7884:24	iq69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase translated **the dead ones** refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are”7894:25	irue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & ἡμῶν & τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here the pronoun **who** refers to Jesus, and **our** refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers”7904:25	cca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς παρεδόθη & ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised”7914:25	b999		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς παρεδόθη	1	Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be **given up** to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed”7924:25	op41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν & διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespasses** and **justification**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous”7934:25	imvc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in [4:23–24](../04/23.md). Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus **was given up**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses”7944:25	gmbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη	1	See how you translated **raised** in the previous verse.7954:25	hzop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being **raised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification”7965:intro	i1dt				0	# Romans 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n    * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)\n    * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)\n    * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)\n    * The blessings of justification (5:1–11)\n    * Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The second Adam\n\nAdam was the first man. He was created by God and called the first “son” of God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Inclusive language\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in [5:1](../05/01.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])7975:1	age4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word **Therefore** here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in [1:18](../01/18.md)–[4:25](../04/25.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true”7985:1	xmp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες & ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “we can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith”7995:1	xott		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him”8005:1	wbwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in [4:16](../04/16.md).8015:1	ldru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	Some ancient copies say “we have peace,” which makes sense, since [5:1–5](../05/01.md) are a list of blessings that belong to those people who have been **justified by faith**. If the reading **let us have peace** is correct, this phrase may be indicating Paul’s desire that his fellow believers continue to experience the peace they have with God. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST.8025:1	kjpb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔχωμεν	1	Paul uses the phrase **let us have peace** to exhort his Christian readers to continue living peacefully with God. It is not a command. This phrase does not imply that those who have been **justified by faith** do not yet have peace with God. Use a form in your language that communicates an exhortation. Alternate translation: “we must continue to have”8035:1	hi12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form, as in the UST.8045:1	o2yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they could possess or own **peace**. He means that they can live peacefully with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “let us live in a peaceful manner”8055:1	s6xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχωμεν & ἡμῶν	1	Here and throughout this chapter, **us** and **our** inclusively refer to all those **having been justified by faith** in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “let us believers have … our”8065:1	xaeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **through** indicates that **our Lord Jesus Christ** is the means by which believers have **peace with God**. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have **peace with God**, as briefly mentioned in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” or “which was caused by our Lord Jesus Christ”8075:2	slyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **access**, **faith**, or **grace**, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “through whom we also access and stand in how gracious God is by trusting in him”8085:2	tsbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗ	1	The pronoun **whom** refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ”8095:2	i50u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ & ἐσχήκαμεν & ἑστήκαμεν & καυχώμεθα	1	The pronoun **we** in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast”8105:2	af0n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is”8115:2	dxcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God”8125:2	zp5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using possessive forms to describe how **glory** relates to **God**. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in [3:23](../03/23.md). Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God”8135:3	q5p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The pronoun **this** here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God”8145:3	c644		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν	1	Here, **in our sufferings** could mean: (1) believers can **boast** about their **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed”8155:3	xeak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	Here, **knowing** indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are the reasons why believers can **boast in our sufferings**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “since we know”8165:3	c0rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν & ἡ θλῖψις & ὑπομονὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings**, **suffering**, and **endurance**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer, it … a way to endure”8175:3	lo57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Paul speaks of **endurance** as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when Christians trust in God while **suffering**, they develop greater **endurance** than they had before experiencing **suffering**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “this suffering helps us know how to endure”8185:4	w7c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and this character produces hope”8195:4	dt8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ὑπομονὴ	1	See how you translated **endurance** in the previous verse.8205:4	gjvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ	1	The word translated **character** refers specifically to the mental and moral qualities of someone who has been approved by God because they have successfully endured testing. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **character**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “qualities of which God approves, and the approved qualities”8215:4	eh9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίδα	1	See how you translated **hope** in [5:2](../05/02.md).8225:5	u4xh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us, that hope does not disappoint”8235:5	rctz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς	1	Here, **that hope** refers to "the hope of the glory of God" in [5:2](../05/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God”8245:5	qka8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	Paul speaks of **love** as if it were something that could be **poured** out of a container, and he speaks figurative of **our hearts** as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who was given to us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people”8255:5	dc95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom God gave us, has poured the love of God into our hearts”8265:5	clmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **love** relates to **God**. Here, **the love of God** could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “our love for God”8275:5	glt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	See how you translated this word in [1:21](../01/21.md).8285:6	x5eg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows in [5:6–8](../05/06.md) explains “the love of God” in [5:5](../05/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,”8295:6	a7s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak”8305:6	xqr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1	Here, **weak** means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous”8315:6	xl85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν	1	Here, **ungodly ones** refers to the **we** mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on behalf of us ungodly ones”8325:7	o92c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here,**For** introduces an explanation, by contrast, of how surprising it is that Christ would die on behalf of ungodly sinners, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST.8335:7	h089		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	μόλις γὰρ & τις ἀποθανεῖται & γὰρ & τάχα τις	1	Paul uses **someone** twice in this verse in two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that perhaps someone”8345:7	x60d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ & τάχα τις	2	What follows the word **though** here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although **someone will hardly die** for **a righteous person**, **someone** might possibly be willing to die for a **good person**. Although Paul does not state the difference between **a righteous person** and **a good person**, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to willingly die on behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone”8355:7	mqyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν	1	Paul speaks of dying as if it were a **dare** or challenge for **someone** to overcome. He means that **someone** would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die”8365:8	qh0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτοῦ	1	Paul uses the word **his own** to emphasize how much **God** loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal”8375:8	vh6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us”8385:8	c8vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being sinners”8395:8	fel5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation (omitting the preceding comma): “Christ died for us while we were still being sinners”8405:9	vnxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul described in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Much more, therefore”8415:9	tewt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον	1	**Much more then** here strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of what Christ did for us. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is then much more certain that”8425:9	zp4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	This clause states the reason why **we** can be **much more** certain that **we will be saved**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because we have now been justified by his blood”8435:9	x9yi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his blood having now justified us”8445:9	nvs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated **his blood** in [3:25](../03/25.md).8455:9	jbaz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will save us”8465:9	bev3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὀργῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **the wrath**, you could use a different expression. Here, **the wrath** refers specifically to “the day of wrath”, which is mentioned in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “when God finally judges sinners”8475:10	wply		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So”8485:10	mz06		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐχθροὶ ὄντες	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since, being enemies”8495:10	rnc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the death of his Son reconciled us to God”8505:10	cu3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God.8515:10	o1m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	Here, **much more** strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of **having been reconciled** with **God**. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain”8525:10	n817		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλλαγέντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he having reconciled us”8535:10	e4ug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καταλλαγέντες	1	This clause states the reason why **we** can be **much more** certain that **we will be saved**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because we have been reconciled”8545:10	tmxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his life will save us”8555:10	gcto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σωθησόμεθα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the similar statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “when God finally judges people, we will be saved ”8565:10	eeo4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	Here **life** implies the **life** that Jesus has after God made him alive again. This resurrection **life** showed that God had accepted Jesus’ death as the payment for the sins of everyone who trusts in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ life after God caused him to become alive again”8575:10	b3z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him being alive again”8585:11	a0vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The pronoun **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not only are we saved by his life, but” (2) what Paul said in [5:2–10](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “Not only are all these things true, but”8595:11	zp36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ **boast** about how great God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we also are boasting about how great God is” or “we also are boasting because of God”8605:11	uukm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **through** indicates that **our Lord Jesus Christ** is the means by which believers can boast. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to be able to boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us”8615:11	r0zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν	1	Here, **through** indicates that Jesus is the means by which believers **have received the reconciliation**. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what he did for us that caused us to receive the reconciliation”8625:11	xjes		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now been reconciled with God”8635:12	hjx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The phrase **For this reason** indicates that what follows in [5:12–21](../05/12.md) is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human **sin** and God’s grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because of this”8645:12	wf9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **death** as if they were objects that could enter a place or spread within people. Paul means that the way God intended for **the world** and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by **sin** and **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as through one man sin began to exist in the world, and that sin would result in that man’s death, so also all men born after that man would die too”8655:12	pa8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul uses the phrase **one man** to refer to Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “through the first man, Adam,”8665:12	smc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία & τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως & ὁ θάνατος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sin** and **death**, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die”8675:12	uxcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and through sin death entered into the world”8685:12	xhbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people”8695:12	jy25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ᾧ πάντες ἥμαρτον	1	Here the pronoun **which** could refer to: (1) the fact that Paul states in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “because of this fact, namely, that all sinned” (2) the **one man** mentioned earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “because of the one man, all sinned”8705:12	si2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people”8715:13	at4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows in [5:13–14](../05/13.md) explains what came before it. Here it explains how death and **sin** existed before the **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,”8725:13	e6bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου & μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … as that was when there was no law”8735:13	abjg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	In this verse **law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews. See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md).8745:13	v51t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated **sin** in the previous verse.8755:13	uyd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that could exist in a place. Paul means that people sinned **in the world** before God gave his laws to Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people sinned in the world”8765:13	juq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin”8775:13	izno			ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins”8785:13	v5l9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Here, **being** could indicate: (1) the reason why **sin is not charged**. Alternate translation: “because there was no law” (2) the time when **sin is not charged**. Alternate translation: “when there was no law”8795:13	j04c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Here, **no law** implies that God had not yet given people his laws that could help them identify what sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being no law to identify to people what sin is”8805:14	bd3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς	1	Here Paul speaks of **death** as if it were a king who **ruled** **over** people. Paul means that nobody could prevent themselves from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human from Adam until Moses could escape dying, even those” or “human life from Adam until Moses inevitably ended in death, even the lives of those”8815:14	u66m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ θάνατος	1	See how you translated **death** in [5:12](../05/12.md).8825:14	pdrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως	1	Here, **Adam** refers to the period of time when Adam lived and **Moses** refers to the period of time when **Moses** lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam lived until the time when Moses lived”8835:14	w24g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1	This phrase gives further information about over whom **death ruled**. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of **Adam** and **Moses**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey God in the same way as did Adam”8845:14	skns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **likeness**, **transgression**, and **pattern**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Adam transgressed, who typifies the one who is coming” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who resembles the one who is coming”8855:14	k2w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the likeness** relates to the **transgression**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed”8865:14	e4ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	Paul speaks of **Adam** as if he were a model or **pattern**. Paul means that **Adam**’s role is similar to the role of **the one who is coming** because both people do things that affect all human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of the one who is coming” or “Adam, who models the one who is coming”8875:14	mu4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	The phrase **the one who is coming** refers to Jesus. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who would come in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus, who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus, who was destined to come”8885:15	x37x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & τὸ χάρισμα & τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **trespass**, **gracious gift**, **grace**, and **gift**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave”8895:15	ieb0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the gracious gift is not like the trespass”8905:15	sful		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of the difference between the **trespass** and the **gracious gift**. Use a connection word or other way to indicate that the second sentence of this verse explains the first one. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You see,”8915:15	yxej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gracious gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “as”8925:15	kdhb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the trespass** that was committed by the **one** man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed”8935:15	e9me		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ & τοὺς πολλοὺς	1	Here Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST.8945:15	h6c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	Here, **how much more** strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of **the trespass** of Adam and the **grace of God** that comes through **Jesus Christ**. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly”8955:15	tfhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “abounded to the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ”8965:15	ejxz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is”8975:15	wn36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the grace** that comes from **the one man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man”8985:16	ns9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned”8995:16	rmpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δώρημα & τὸ δὲ χάρισμα	1	See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse.9005:16	ok2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the same as what came through one who sinned”9015:16	muum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1	Here, **one who sinned** refers to Adam, as mentioned in [5:12–15](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one who sinned”9025:16	ub9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & κρίμα	2	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST.9035:16	eusx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1	Here, **one** refers to the **one** sin Adam committed. It does not refer to Adam himself, as the previous **one** does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Adam’s trespass” or “from the sin Adam committed”9045:16	xza3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1	Here, **from one** could indicate: (1) that **the judgment** happened after the **one** trespass. Alternate translation: “after one” (2) that **the judgment** happened because of the **one** trespass. Alternate translation: “because of one”9055:16	t4t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κατάκριμα & παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation**, **trespasses**, and **justification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify”9065:16	s82t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς κατάκριμα	1	Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **judgment**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “to the resulting condemnation”9075:16	m5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων	1	Here, **from many trespasses** could indicate: (1) that **the gracious gift** happened after **many trespasses**. Alternate translation: “after many trespasses” (2) that **the gracious gift** happened because of **many trespasses**. Alternate translation: “because of many trespasses”9085:16	jarb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαίωμα	1	Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **gracious gift**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “to the resulting justification”9095:17	n5zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces a further explanation of the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift, as discussed in [5:15–16](../05/15.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact”9105:17	mhtc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “considering that”9115:17	lcyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1	See how you translated this phrase in [5:15](../05/15.md).9125:17	whbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑνός & τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	See how you translated the first occurrence of **one** in the previous verse.9135:17	yvq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος & τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης & ἐν ζωῇ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living”9145:17	kz6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [5:14](../05/14.md).9155:17	mtr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνός	1	Here, **through** indicates that **the one** is the reason why **death ruled**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one”9165:17	lf7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	See how you translated this phrase in [5:10](../05/10.md) and [5:15](../05/15.md).9175:17	hfvt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through the one man Jesus Christ will … rule in life”9185:17	xy6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were kings who **rule** in a location called **life**. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they **will rule** with **Jesus Christ** while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally”9195:17	nr25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες	1	This clause describes the people who will **rule in life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of the grace and the gift of the righteousness as well”9205:17	fodc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος & λαμβάνοντες	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **abundance** that relates to **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is”9215:17	o8c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **righteousness** is a **gift**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gift, which is that of being made righteous,”9225:17	ehbk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **through** indicates that **the one, Jesus Christ** is the reason why his people will **rule in life**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one, Jesus Christ”9235:17	uifs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The phrase **the one, Jesus Christ** refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to **rule in life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what the one, Jesus Christ has done for them”9245:18	e7cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, as one man trespassed and this trespass caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteously and this act caused all men to become justified for living eternally”9255:18	mccf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	**So then** indicates that what follows in [5:18–21](../05/18.md) summarizes the ideas of [5:12–17](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary”9265:18	sfwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ & δι’	1	See how you translated **through** in the previous verse.9275:18	z0jq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραπτώματος & κατάκριμα & δικαίωσιν	1	See how you translated **trespass**, **condemnation**, and **justification** in [5:16](../05/16.md).9285:18	n8pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους	-1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated **all men** in [5:12](../05/12.md).9295:18	bcm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **justification** relates to **life**. This could mean: (1) **justification** that leads to **life**. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) **justification** that is **life**. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life”9305:18	bmey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωῆς	1	Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever”9315:19	hj69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,”9325:19	sjek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated the similar connective words **just as** and **so also** in the previous verse.9335:19	rgji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1	See how you translated **through** in the previous two verses.9345:19	z8r8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου & τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God”9355:19	qpsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Here, **the one man** refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of **one man** in [5:12](../05/12.md).9365:19	q8lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused the many to become sinners”9375:19	huig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοί	-1	See how you translated **the many** in [5:15](../05/15.md).9385:19	px2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἁμαρτωλοὶ	1	See how you translated **sinners** in [5:8](../05/08.md).9395:19	bhra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς, δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the obedience of the one caused the many to become righteous ones”9405:19	haks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς	2	Here, **the one** refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in [5:17](../05/17.md).9415:20	lah6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμος	1	See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md).9425:20	w958		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παρεισῆλθεν	1	The word translated **slipped in** can refer to sneaking in unnoticed, as in [Jude 1:4](../jud/01/04.md). Paul may be stressing how the coming of **the law** was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed”9435:20	ttcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated **trespass** in [5:15–18](../05/15.md), **sin** in [5:12–13](../05/12.md), and **grace** in [5:15](../05/15.md) and [5:17](../05/17.md).9445:20	relk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα & ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις	1	Paul speaks of **the trespass**, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious”9455:20	wbh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα	1	This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving **the law**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing”9465:20	godn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ	1	Here Paul uses **where** to refer to **sin** and **grace** as if they were located somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “as”9475:21	ycy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God caused grace to abound, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that”9485:21	ymxy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md).9495:21	leu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ & ἡ χάρις & δικαιοσύνης & ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	See how you translated **sin** and **grace** in the previous verse, **death** and **righteousness** in [5:17](../05/17.md), and **eternal life** in [2:7](../02/07.md).9505:21	wmy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that everyone was controlled by their sinful desires. While death **ruled** in [5:14](../05/14.md), **sin ruled** after God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone was controlled by sin”9515:21	wuh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here, **in death** could refer to: (1) the location in which **sin ruled**. Alternate translation: “in the place where death exists” (2) the means by which **sin ruled**. Alternate translation: “by means of death”9525:21	kc21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Here Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that God’s **grace** allows people to become righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is might make people become righteous”9535:21	bk72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1	See how you translated **through** in the [5:17–19](../05/17.md).9545:21	c9nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **grace** ruling **through righteousness**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “resulted in eternal life”9555:21	axr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	The phrase **Jesus Christ our Lord** refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have **eternal life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ our Lord has done for them”9566:intro	v522				0	# Romans 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n    * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)\n    * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Slavery\n\nIn this chapter Paul frequently uses the metaphor of the relationship between slaves and their masters. He speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were slaves to sin and the death it causes ([6:6](../06/06.md), [16–17](../06/16.md), [20](../06/20.md)). He also speaks figuratively of Christians as if God has freed them from being enslaved to sin and has himself or righteousness as their master ([6:18](../06/18.md), [22](../06/22.md)). Because Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, they should instead serve God and live in a way that glorifies him ([6:12–14](../06/12.md), [19](../06/19.md)). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/servant]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nIn [6:1–3](../06/01.md), [15–16](../06/15.md), and [21](../06/21.md) Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to answer objections that people might make about what he is saying.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Inclusive language\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “baptized into Christ Jesus” in [6:3](../06/03.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])9576:1	fxgw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [5:20](../05/20.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [4:1](../04/01.md).9586:1	pvg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address rumors some people may have been spreading that misrepresent his teachings. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that we should continue in the sin so that the grace might increase!”9596:1	t8tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.9606:1	fj9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν	1	Here, **we** includes all those of whom Paul spoke as those “who were baptized into Christ Jesus,” as mentioned in [6:3](../06/03.md), so **we** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms.9616:1	ngpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated **sin** and **grace** in [5:21](../05/21.md).9626:1	sa16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a location. He is referring to the idea of people continuing to live sinfully after they have become Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully”9636:1	ju6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	Paul speaks here of **grace** as if it were an object that could **increase** in amount, as he also does in [5:20](../05/20.md). He is referring to the idea of Christians experiencing the power or influence of **grace** in their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “so that we can experience more grace”9646:1	f5qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	The phrase **so that** here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the supposed purpose for which someone would **sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the grace”9656:2	e82n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’”9666:2	pa6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md).9676:2	wvhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We who died to sin surely cannot still live in it!”9686:2	rgte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?	1	Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a location where Christians could live or die. Here, **died to sin** refers to the idea that Christians are no longer controlled by their sinful desires. By contrast, **live in** sin means to continue being controlled by sinful desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer controlled by our desire to sin, how could we still live as though we are controlled by that desire”9696:3	wwaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ὅτι ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that as many as were baptized into Christ Jesus were baptized into his death!”9706:3	wh26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as”9716:3	yy94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many people as someone baptized into Christ Jesus someone also baptized into his death”9726:3	bd11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	Paul speaks of **Christ Jesus** and **his death** as if they were locations into which someone could be **baptized**. Here, **into Christ Jesus** refers to being united with **Christ Jesus**, and **into his death** refers to sharing in the spiritual benefits of **his death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these two phrases plainly. Alternative translation: “were baptized are united with Christ Jesus and also share in the benefits of his death”9736:3	tcve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον	1	See how you translated **death** in [5:21](../05/21.md).9746:4	m43r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	συνετάφημεν οὖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “We were buried, therefore”9756:4	f4va		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ	1	Paul speaks of Christians as if they **were buried** with Jesus when they were baptized. Paul mentions burial because it emphasizes that Jesus did indeed die. Here he means that Christians are indeed united with Christ’s **death** and share in its spiritual benefits. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We are indeed united, then, with Christ’s death” or “We are so united, then, with Christ’s death that it is as if we were really buried with him”9766:4	vva7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	Here, **through** indicates that the following phrase is the means by which Christians **were buried** with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the baptism into his death”9776:4	kmn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.9786:4	y71v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον & τῆς δόξης & ζωῆς	1	See how you translated **death** in [6:3](../06/03.md), **glory** in [5:2](../05/02.md), and **life** in [5:21](../05/21.md).9796:4	k1el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted **baptism**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father”9806:4	kado		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md).9816:4	z6zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1	The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being **raised** from the dead, as Christ was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father”9826:4	dpy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones”9836:4	t47r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md).9846:4	ce9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md).9856:4	gblc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **glory** that comes from or characterizes **the Father**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through the glory from the Father” or “through the Father’s glory”9866:4	y29w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς δόξης	1	Here, **the glory** refers specifically to God’s glorious power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the glorious power”9876:4	r3hn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	**Father** is an important title for God.9886:4	gtns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act”9896:4	hyab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **life** that is characterized by **newness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with a new life” or “like those made newly alive”9906:5	msbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So then,”9916:5	jdzp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because”9926:5	p6xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of **death** as if it were something with which Christians could be physically **planted together**. He means that by being baptized, Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we participate in Christ’s death through baptism”9936:5	z8wa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ & τῆς ἀναστάσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **likeness** and **resurrection**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead”9946:5	hg5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul implies that **likeness of his death** refers to the “baptism” referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death that is represented by baptism” or “in baptism, which represents dying with him”9956:5	kfvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks of **resurrection** as if it were something of which Christians could **become part**. He means that Christians will one day rise from the dead like Christ did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we will also certainly be resurrected like Christ”9966:6	fhvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man together with him”9976:6	lu12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1	Paul speaks of **our** sinful human nature as if it were an **old man** who was nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was **crucified**, he destroyed the power of **sin** and death that controlled all humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God destroyed the power of sin that controlled people when Christ was crucified”9986:6	y0ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνεσταυρώθη	1	The pronoun **him** refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ”9996:6	n6o6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **crucified our old man**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that”10006:6	jpge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might nullify the body of sin”10016:6	jw00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul speaks of **the body of sin** as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled. He means that Christ’s crucifixion removed the ability of sinful desires to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God might completely end how living sinfully controls people”10026:6	l6pd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the body** is related to **sin**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **the body of sin** could refer to: (1) how humans tend to **sin**. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies”10036:6	l3zm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	See how you translated **sin** in [6:1](../06/01.md).10046:6	c5ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν	1	Here, **for** could indicate: (1) God’s purpose for nullifying **the body of sin**. Alternate translation: “in order for it to no longer enslave” (2) the result of **the body of sin** being **nullified**. Alternate translation: “causing it to no longer enslave”10056:6	rpax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	Paul speaks of **the body of sin** as if it could **enslave** people. Here he means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for it to no longer make us live sinfully”10066:7	f893		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἀποθανὼν	1	Here Paul implies that **the one having died** is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” ([6:2](../06/02.md)) to be **freed from** living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin”10076:7	qvgd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul continues the metaphor of **sin** enslaving people from the previous verse. Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were something that people need to be **freed from**. He means that the desire to **sin** that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer has to live sinfully”10086:7	hoqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδικαίωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has freed”10096:7	geua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated **sin** in the previous verse.10106:8	mbx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because”10116:8	wwhf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ	1	Paul speaks of Christians as if they physically died with Christ. He means that through baptism Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day **live together with him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we are united to Christ’s death when baptized”10126:8	c724		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πιστεύομεν	1	Paul implies that since Christians have **died with Christ**, the result is that they have confidence that they will **live together with him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us”10136:8	nuc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ	1	Here Paul implies that **live together with him** refers to “eternal life”, as he mentioned in [5:21](../05/21.md) and [6:4–5](../06/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him”10146:9	bebx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ no longer dies, having been raised from dead ones”10156:9	zdkc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰδότες ὅτι	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [6:6](../06/06.md).10166:9	gjqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised Christ from dead ones, Christ”10176:9	zkq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated the similar clause in [6:4](../06/04.md).10186:9	lvv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει	1	These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **Christ** can never die again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will absolutely never die again”10196:9	wem1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει	1	Here Paul speaks of **death** as if it were a **lord** who could rule over someone. Paul means that Jesus could not possibly die again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he can never die again”10206:9	kl3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος	1	See how you translated **death** in [6:4](../06/04.md).10216:10	ehi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Christ “no longer dies,” as stated in the previous verse. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a reason, as in the UST.10226:10	e290		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ	1	Here, **that which** refers to Christ’s death and life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the death which”10236:10	aw31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν	1	Here, **to sin** implies that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin.” It does not mean that Jesus himself was ever controlled by sin before he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of removing sin’s control over people” or “he died to stop sin from controlling people”10246:10	j7bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ δὲ ζῇ	1	Here, **what he lives** refers to Christ’s life after God raised him from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But the life which”10256:10	z4yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, **to God** implies that Christ now lives for the sake of glorifying God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he lives for the sake of glorifying God”10266:11	zjjv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1	Throughout [6:11–23](../06/11.md), the pronouns **you** and “your” are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers at Rome”10276:11	dw6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	See how you translated “died to sin” in [6:2](../06/02.md).10286:11	bjxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῶντας & τῷ Θεῷ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse.10296:11	nkvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md).10306:12	pp2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	**Therefore** here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating how he wants his readers to act in response to what he said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “Because of this”10316:12	s6h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ & βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a king who rules over a place called **mortal body**. By **do not let sin rule**, Paul means that Christians should not allow **sin** to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of **rule** in [5:21](../05/21.md). Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning”10326:12	z1ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι,	1	Although **body** here is a singular noun, Paul is referring to the bodies of his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a plural form. Alternate translation: “in your mortal bodies”10336:12	cm8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	Here, **body** could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “in you” or “in your whole being” (2) the physical human body. Alternative translation: “in your physical body”10346:12	r462		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	Here **to** indicates that what follows is the result of letting **sin rule**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to obey its lusts” or “resulting in you obeying your lusts”10356:12	yg9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of **lusts** as if they were people who could be obeyed. He means that people can submit to their desires to do sinful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to submit to your lustful desires” or “to do what you lust for”10366:12	zs9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lusts**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust”10376:12	kh3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun **its** refers to **mortal body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s”10386:13	wt07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses in order to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not keep presenting your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members as tools of righteousness to God. And present yourselves to God, as living from dead ones”10396:13	mxto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of body parts as if they were **tools** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God”10406:13	qncn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅπλα ἀδικίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously”10416:13	hlzf			ὅπλα & ὅπλα	1	The word translated as **tools** often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”10426:13	dq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικίας & δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness** and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is unrighteous … of what is righteous”10436:13	wq3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give yourselves to God”10446:13	px9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας	1	The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now **dead to sin, but alive to God**, as mentioned in [6:11](../06/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully”10456:13	vk76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [6:4](../06/04.md).10466:13	amyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members”10476:13	dz8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously”10486:14	xfz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,”10496:14	u36f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you”10506:14	gez3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [6:12](../06/12.md).10516:14	bl09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἁμαρτία & οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over”10526:14	caqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges his readers to not allow **sin** to **lord over** them. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since”10536:14	a0dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Paul speaks of **law** and **grace** as if they were rulers **under** whose authority people have to live. He means that Christians are no longer controlled by the requirements of the **law**, which resulted in people sinning more, as stated in [5:20](../05/20.md). By contrast, Christians now serve the gracious God, as is explained in [6:15–23](../06/15.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for the law no longer controls you, but you are now controlled by God’s grace”10546:14	eibi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md).10556:14	ypqx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Here, **grace** refers specifically to God’s gracious empowering of people to stop sinning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “controlled by God’s grace”10566:15	yk81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [6:1–14](../06/01.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md), [4:1](../04/01.md), and [6:1](../06/01.md).10576:15	zxb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question form here to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!”10586:15	rtts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	In these two sentences, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.10596:15	t4cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον & ὑπὸ χάριν	1	See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse.10606:15	t52x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he posed earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’”10616:15	c77g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md).10626:16	n5j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε—ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!”10636:16	hn6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ & ᾧ	1	The pronoun translated **what** here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever … to whomever or whatever”10646:16	g6zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους & δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε	1	Paul speaks of people as if they could offer themselves as **slaves** to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey”10656:16	psrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοήν	1	Here, **for** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are **presenting** themselves as **slaves**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying”10666:16	zim4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοήν & ὑπακοῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey”10676:16	h0ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, **sin** and **obedience** are spoken of as if they were masters that **slaves** would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to **sin** or a desire to obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness”10686:16	gtzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἁμαρτίας & ὑπακοῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that belong to **sin** or **obedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves”10696:16	cyct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated **sin** in [6:1](../06/01.md) and **righteousness** in [6:13](../06/13.md).10706:16	zfgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς θάνατον & εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness”10716:16	d8gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually”10726:17	xj75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, **thanks be to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!”10736:17	tl5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Here, **that** indicates that the clause that follows provides a contrast between who Paul’s readers were before they became Christians and who they were after they had **listened from the heart** to true Christian **teaching**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even though you were slaves of sin”10746:17	yxt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated the similar phrase **of sin** in the previous verse.10756:17	uwcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς & τύπον διδαχῆς	1	Here Paul speaks of **the pattern of teaching** as if it were a person who could be **listened** to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching”10766:17	ep7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπηκούσατε	1	The word translated **listened** implies that the people who listened also responded by obeying what they heard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you clung”10776:17	my2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπηκούσατε & ἐκ καρδίας	1	Here, **from the heart** is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within”10786:17	lugj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς	1	Here Paul speaks of **the pattern of teaching** as if it were a slave-master to which people are **given over to** as slaves when they become Christians. Paul means that Christians should submit to the authority of true Christian teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the pattern of teaching that you were submitted to” or “to the pattern of teaching that you were handed over to, as if you were its slave”10796:17	pz14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃν παρεδόθητε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave you over to” or10806:18	fcd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **righteousness** as if they were slave-masters that people could be **enslaved** to. Paul means that his readers are no longer controlled by their sinful desires, but are controlled by the desire to live righteously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And having been freed from having to live sinfully, you now have to live righteously”10816:18	y2zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “And God having freed you from sin, he enslaved you”10826:18	twpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνῃ	1	See how you translated **sin** and **righteousness** in [6:16](../06/16.md).10836:19	jlmd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms”10846:19	puvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω	1	Here, **as a man** is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being”10856:19	gt1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν & τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **weakness**, **uncleanness**, **lawlessness**, **righteousness**, and **sanctification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified”10866:19	l4ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	Here, **flesh** is an idiom that refers to human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations”10876:19	psmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [6:17–18](../06/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moreover,”10886:19	x2kt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως	1	See how you translated **just as** and **so** in the [5:19](../05/19.md).10896:19	jbcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Paul speaks of body parts as if they were **slaves** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in [6:13](../06/13.md). Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously”10906:19	o0ta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	The phrase **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification”10916:20	s9pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is that”10926:20	i1ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτε & δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Here, Paul speaks of **sin** and **righteousness** as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as **slaves** of **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously”10936:20	mu0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of **free**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were unable to live righteously”10946:21	x3bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τίνα & καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?”10956:21	kjl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So you were not then having any fruit because of which things you are now ashamed!”10966:21	vgam		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καρπὸν	1	Here, **fruit** is an idiom that refers to a benefit or advantage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit”10976:21	pnbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφ’ οἷς & ἐκείνων	1	Here, **which things** and **those things** refer to sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins”10986:21	j2ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **outcome** and **death**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “For those things finally result in you dying”10996:21	tj21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md).11006:22	x8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δέ	1	**But now** introduces a contrast with the previous two verses, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated **now** refers to the time after the Roman believers became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what **now** refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,”11016:22	cqlf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	This clause indicates the reason why Paul’s readers have **fruit leading to sanctification**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because you have been freed from sin and have been enslaved to God”11026:22	fmtc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **God** as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, but are supposed to obey **God** instead. See a similar phrase in [6:18](../06/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been freed from having to live sinfully and having begun to serve God”11036:22	z3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having freed you from sin and having enslaved you to himself” or “God having released you from being controlled by your sin and having caused you to serve him”11046:22	npf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν	1	See how you translated **fruit** in the previous verse.11056:22	a478		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ & τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	See how you translated **sanctification** in [6:19](../06/19.md), **outcome** in [6:21](../06/21.md), and **eternal life** in [5:21](../05/21.md).11066:22	lvhh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [6:19](../06/19.md).11076:23	gacy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason for what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because”11086:23	ze3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	Here, Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could pay **wages**. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully, it results in eternal death”11096:23	juc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	Paul speaks of **death** as if it were **wages** paid to those who **sin**. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work”11106:23	iyv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the wages** that come from **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin”11116:23	pizh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md) and [6:21](../06/21.md).11126:23	slyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος; τὸ & χάρισμα & ζωὴ αἰώνιος	1	See how you translated **death** in [6:21](../06/21.md), **gracious gift** in [5:15–16](../05/15.md), and **eternal life** in [6:22](../06/22.md).11136:23	cwkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gracious gift** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God”11146:23	jn66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul speaks of **eternal life** as if it were occupying space inside of **Christ Jesus**. Paul means that **eternal life** comes by being united to **Christ Jesus**, as stated in [6:11](../06/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus”11157:intro	fl1y				0	# Romans 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n    * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)\n    * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)\n    * Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)\n    * The law is not sinful (7:7–12)\n    * Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “The Law”\n\nThroughout most of this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. However, in [7:21–25](../07/21.md) Paul uses the word “law” in several different ways. Each of these different uses will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Marriage\n\nScripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Inclusive language\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all Jewish believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [7:1](../07/01.md) and [7:4](../07/04.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])11167:1	mk7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the law of Moses his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know, brothers (for I am speaking to those who know the law), that the law is lord of the man for as long as he lives!”11177:1	guk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here to refer to both male and female Jewish believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “my fellow Jewish Christians”11187:1	s4su			(γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ)	1	Here Paul interrupts himself in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers in the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as done in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate this.11197:1	j67x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, **for** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it explains the reason why Paul expects these **brothers** to understand what he is saying. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I know you should understand this because”11207:1	ajk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λαλῶ	1	The pronoun **I** here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul (See: [6:19](../06/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking”11217:1	k3h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & ὁ νόμος	1	For every occurrence of **the law** in [7:1–20](../07/01.md), translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in [2:12](../02/12.md).11227:1	okz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a king. Paul means that, like a king, **the law** must be obeyed by those who are obligated to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “like a king, the law must be obeyed by every Jewish person”11237:1	r9fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & ζῇ	1	Although **the man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person … that person lives”11247:2	as1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of an example from God’s law that illustrates how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives,” as Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,”11257:2	j4sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται & τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Paul is speaking of Jewish **married** women and husbands in general, not of one particular **woman** or **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands”11267:2	hpn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ & δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her”11277:2	l6d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Here Paul speaks of the **law** as if it were a person who could tie a **woman** to her **husband**. Paul means that the **law** of Moses requires a **married woman** to stay married to her **husband** only while he is alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his law that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband”11287:2	ag23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the law** that is related to **the husband**. This phrase refers to the **law** already described in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that requires her to remain bound to the husband”11297:3	w3yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md).11307:3	ss60		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει, ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “if she becomes married to another husband, the first husband being alive”11317:3	jbvc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was occurring during the same time period as what he describes in the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “at the same time that the husband is alive”11327:3	ci5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνδρὸς & ὁ ἀνήρ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.11337:3	r2m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law will title her an adulteress”11347:3	wg4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου	1	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were an object or person someone could be freed from. Paul means that **the law** that prohibited a woman from marrying **another husband** did not apply if her first husband died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase “she has been released from the law” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “she is no longer required to remain married to the first husband”11357:4	kvqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	**So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in [7:1–3](../07/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true”11367:4	ne64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in [7:1](../07/01.md).11377:4	z8zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law”11387:4	svrq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε	1	Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that even Jewish Christians are not required to obey the law of Moses. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you very Jews yourselves were also made dead” or “even you Jews yourselves were also made dead”11397:4	vpwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ	1	Here Paul uses **made dead** to refer to Jewish Christians not being required to obey the law of Moses. Just as dead people don’t have to obey the law, so too, Jewish Christians no longer have to obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “your yourselves no longer have to obey the law” or “you yourselves are like dead people in that you do not have to obey the law”11407:4	v2tu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **through** indicates that **the body of Christ** is the means by which believers **were made dead to the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the body of Christ”11417:4	glzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **the body of Christ** refers to the death of Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the death of Christ’s body”11427:4	xw6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ	1	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **made** believers **dead to the law**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for us to become married to another”11437:4	g59t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ	1	Here Paul uses **married to another** to refer to Christians being united with **Christ** as if they became **married** to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you might become united to Jesus” or “so that you might be united with Christ like a woman becomes married to another husband”11447:4	rj6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom God raised from dead ones”11457:4	t9nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md).11467:4	gxjj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **raised** Jesus **from dead ones**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to produce fruit for God”11477:4	c4rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses **fruit** here to refer to actions that please God as if they were **fruit** that a person could grow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God”11487:4	ka0o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καρποφορήσωμεν	1	Here, **we** includes all those whom Paul called **brothers** earlier in this verse and in [7:1](../07/01.md), so **we** is inclusive of all Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms.11497:5	i1zl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in the next two verses explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,”11507:5	gmb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦμεν ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a location that someone could be **in**. He means his readers used to live according to the desires of their sinful natures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were living according to our sinful natures” or “we were doing whatever we wanted to do”11517:5	bl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **passions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the desire to sin that was through the law was working”11527:5	g2rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Paul said something similar about **the law** causing sin to increase in [5:20](../05/20.md). Alternate translation: “that were increased through the law were working” or “that were stimulated by the law were working”11537:5	vlev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, **through** indicates the means by which **the sinful passions** increased. Paul means that **the law** stimulated people’s desire to sin even more. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the law”11547:5	tvku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐνηργεῖτο ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of **the sinful passions** are if they were people who could work within someone’s body parts. He means that people’s sinful desires caused them to sin with their bodies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing us to use our members to sin”11557:5	denv			τοῖς μέλεσιν	1	See how you translated **members** in [6:13](../06/13.md).11567:5	pnw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι	1	Here, **to** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “which resulted in producing fruit” or “so that they would produce fruit”11577:5	xed9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here Paul uses **fruit** to refer to the result or outcome of someone’s actions. Paul is using **fruit** differently than how he used it in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that the outcome was fruit for death”11587:5	m071		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	See how you translated **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md).11597:5	ub7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md).11607:6	mze7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	See how you translated this phrase in [6:22](../06/22.md).11617:6	l8w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us”11627:6	j6i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be **released** and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves”11637:6	l2l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	The phrase **that by which we were being held** refers to **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the law by which we were being held”11647:6	vcok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθανόντες ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a location where Christians could die. Here, **died to** the law refers to the idea that Christians no longer have to obey the requirements of the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer being required to obey that by which we were being held”11657:6	zafg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the result of Christians **having died to** the law. Use the natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “the result being that we might serve”11667:6	f9n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “we might serve God”11677:6	c1j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν καινότητι & οὐ παλαιότητι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **newness** and **oldness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people**serve** God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way”11687:6	vhqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι Πνεύματος	1	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **newness** that is produced by **the Spirit**. Paul means that the Holy Spirit enables Christians to live in a new way that pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a new way that comes from the Holy Spirit”11697:6	rm8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	παλαιότητι γράμματος	1	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **oldness** that is determined by **the letter**. Paul means that Christians do not live in the old way that the law of Moses requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the old way that the letter requires”11707:6	iozz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	Paul uses **the letter** to refer to **the law** which is written down with letters. See how you translated this word in [2:27](../02/27.md).11717:7	k1jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	**Then** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses, especially what he said in [7:5](../07/05.md). See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md).11727:7	bnyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in [7:5](../07/05.md) because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that the law is sin!”11737:7	f3hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a Jewish Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.11747:7	zl8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful”11757:7	erx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’”11767:7	u8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md).11777:7	y92j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	**But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what came before it. Here, **But** introduces the contrast to the idea that **the law** is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,”11787:7	zzsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of **the law**. See how you translated the same use of **For** in [7:2](../07/02.md).11797:7	g0np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τήν & ἐπιθυμίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **covetousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous”11807:7	refv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1	Here Paul uses **said** to indicate a quotation from **the law** that is written in the Old Testament ([Exodus 20:17](../exo/20/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law”11817:7	qb5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God **said** what was written down in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law”11827:8	mz77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν & λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could take an **opportunity** and produce **covetousness** within a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet”11837:8	fh6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, **the commandment** refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet”11847:8	w6ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **commandment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded”11857:8	zeb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιθυμίαν	1	See how you translated **covetousness** in the previous verse.11867:8	r5i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	χωρὶς & νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were something which could be **dead**. Paul means that his desire to **sin** would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated”11877:9	cag9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χωρὶς νόμου	1	Here Paul speaks about the **law** as if it did not exist before he knew about it. Paul means that he was not aware of God’s law **at one time**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while unaware of the law” or “without knowledge of the law”11887:9	sz5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλθούσης & τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Paul speaks of **the commandment** as if it were a person who could **come** to Paul. He means that he became aware of **the commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment”11897:9	i90y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated **commandment** and **sin** in the previous verse.11907:9	d4wm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, **the commandment** could refer to: (1) all the commandments that make up God’s law. Alternate translation: “God’s commandments” (2) **the commandment** against coveting, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the commandment against coveting”11917:9	q9le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν	1	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could come **to life**. This could mean: (1) Paul’s desire to sin was stimulated, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin was stimulated” (2) Paul realized that he was sinning, as mentioned in [7:7](../07/07.md). Alternate translation: “I became aware of my sin”11927:10	ouxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἀπέθανον	1	Paul uses **died** here to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually”11937:10	mzx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1	See how you translated **commandment** in the previous verse.11947:10	jmso		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever”11957:10	yu1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν	1	Here, **for** indicates the purpose for **the commandment**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “the commandment that was intended to cause life”11967:10	a0rz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εὑρέθη μοι & αὕτη εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the result of **the commandment**. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal **death** for people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me”11977:10	hkce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be”11987:10	jrrw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1	Here Paul speaks of **the commandment** as if it were an object that could be **found**. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be”11997:10	y97i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατον	1	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md).12007:11	r582		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	See how you translated this clause in [7:8](../07/08.md).

Showing the first 1,200 of 2753 lines. Download the file for the rest.